2008 Jeep Compass Owner's Manual Pdf

: Jeep Jeep-2009-Jeep-Compass-Owners-Manual-817322 jeep-2009-jeep-compass-owners-manual-817322 jeep pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 439 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

COMPASS 2009 owner's manual

2009 COMPASS

Chrysler LLC

81-326-0911 First Edition Printed in U.S.A.

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name

Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the

name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution there-

fore.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of

accidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood

alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are

drinking, don't drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking

driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your

perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,

and your judgment is impaired when you have been

drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of

features and equipment that are either standard or op-

tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a

description of features and equipment that are no longer

available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please

disregard any features and equipment described in this

manual that are not on this vehicle.

Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in

design and specifications, and/or make additions to or

improvements to its products without imposing any

obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-

ously manufactured.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION PAGE

INTRODUCTION

.............................................................3

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

...............................9

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

...............................71

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

................................... 157

STARTING AND OPERATING

.................................................247

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

...............................................329

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

...............................................343

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

..................................................389

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

..........................................407

INDEX

....................................................................417

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

䡵Introduction ...........................4

䡵Rollover Warning ........................4

䡵How To Use This Manual ..................5

䡵Warnings And Cautions ...................7

䡵Vehicle Identification Number ...............7

䡵Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ............8

INTRODUCTION

This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assis-

tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint

you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.

It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet

and various customer-oriented documents. You are

urged to read these publications carefully. Following the

instructions and recommendations in this manual will

help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored

in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain

with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will

be aware of all safety warnings.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized

dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained

technicians and genuine Mopar威parts, and is interested

in your satisfaction.

ROLLOVER WARNING

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate

than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher

ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than

many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in

a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an

unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because

of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of

control it may roll over when some other vehicles may

not.

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other

unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle

control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result

in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal

injury. Drive carefully.

4 INTRODUCTION

Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided

is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.

government notes that the universal use of existing seat

belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more

each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two

million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person

is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing

a seat belt. Always buckle up.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section

contains the information you desire.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual

contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the

symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout

this Owner's Manual:

Rollover Warning Label

INTRODUCTION 5

6 INTRODUCTION

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner's Manual contains WARNINGS against op-

erating procedures that could result in an accident or

bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-

dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you

do not read this entire manual, you may miss important

information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the

left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through

the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle

registration and title.

Vehicle Identification Number

INTRODUCTION 7

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and

may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or

death.

8 INTRODUCTION

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵A Word About Your Keys ................. 12

▫Ignition Key Removal .................. 12

▫Locking Doors With The Key ............. 15

▫Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................ 15

䡵Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped ......... 15

▫To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel ....... 15

▫To Release The Steering Wheel Lock ........ 15

䡵Sentry Key 威........................... 16

▫Replacement Keys ..................... 17

▫Customer Key Programming ............. 18

▫General Information .................... 19

䡵Vehicle Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . 19

▫To Set The Security Alarm ............... 19

▫To Disarm The System .................. 20

▫Vehicle Security Alarm System Manual

Override ............................ 20

䡵Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped ......... 20

▫To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ......... 21

▫Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All First

Press .............................. 21

▫Illuminated Approach — If Equipped ....... 22

▫To Lock The Doors And Liftgate ........... 22

▫Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock ........ 22

▫Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock/Unlock . . 23

▫Using The Panic Alarm ................. 24

▫Programming Additional Transmitters ....... 24

▫General Information .................... 24

▫RKE Transmitter Battery Replacement ....... 25

䡵Door Locks ........................... 26

▫Manual Door Locks .................... 26

▫Power Door Locks ..................... 27

▫Child-Protection Door Lock System

(Rear Doors) — If Equipped .............. 31

䡵Power Windows — If Equipped ............ 32

▫Power Window Switches ................ 32

▫Auto Down .......................... 33

▫Window Lockout Switch ................ 34

䡵Liftgate .............................. 34

䡵Occupant Restraints ..................... 36

▫Lap/Shoulder Belts .................... 37

▫Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 42

▫Second Row Center Lap/Shoulder Belt

Operating Instructions .................. 42

▫Seat Belt Pretensioners .................. 46

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

▫Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System

(BeltAlert威 ).......................... 46

▫Seat Belt Extender ..................... 47

▫Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ........... 48

▫Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental

Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag ............ 48

▫Event Data Recorder (EDR) .............. 58

▫Child Restraint ....................... 60

䡵Engine Break-In Recommendations .......... 68

䡵Safety Tips ............................ 69

▫Exhaust Gas ......................... 69

▫Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle ............................. 69

▫Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make

Outside The Vehicle .................... 70

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has

the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These

numbers can be used to order duplicate keys. Ask your

authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a

safe place.

Ignition Key Removal

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

1. Place the shift lever in PARK.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (Accessory)

position.

3. Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to

the LOCK position.

4. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.

Vehicle Key

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the

shift lever in PARK, the key may become trapped tem-

porarily in the ignition switch cylinder. If this occurs,

rotate the key to the right slightly, then remove the key as

described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap

the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this

safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started

and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you

obtain service.

WARNING!

Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving

unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-

ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the keys in the

ignition. A child could operate power windows,

other controls, or move the vehicle.

Ignition Switch Positions

1 — LOCK 3 — ON

2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) 4 — START

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

CAUTION!

An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always

remove the key from the ignition and lock all the

doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Manual Transmission

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (Accessory)

position.

2. Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to

the LOCK position.

3. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.

Ignition Switch Positions

1 — LOCK 3 — ON

2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) 4 — START

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Locking Doors With The Key

You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the

door, turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn

the key to the left. Refer to "Body Lubrication" under

"Maintenance Procedures" in Section 7.

Key-In-Ignition Reminder

Opening the driver's door when the key is in the ignition

sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.

NOTE: With the driver's door open and the key in the

ignition, the power door locks and Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter will not function.

STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED

Your manual transmission vehicle is equipped with a

passive steering wheel lock. This lock prevents steering

the vehicle without the ignition key. If the steering wheel

is moved approximately a half turn in either direction

and the key is not in the ignition switch, the steering

wheel will lock.

To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel

With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside

down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the

steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock

engages.

To Release The Steering Wheel Lock

Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.

If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to

the right or left to disengage the lock.

NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage

the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to

disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage

the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

SENTRY KEY姞

The Sentry Key威Immobilizer System prevents unautho-

rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The

system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation

is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked

or unlocked.

The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded

electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized

vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro-

grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate

the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two

seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the

engine.

NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also

considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the

ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.

During normal operation, after turning on the ignition

switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three

seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the

bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the

electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle Security Light

begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that

someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine.

Either of these conditions will result in the engine being

shut off after two seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal

vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-

onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.

Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as

possible.

NOTE:

•

The Sentry Key威Immobilizer System is not compat-

ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.

Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting

problems and loss of security protection.

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

•

Exxon/Mobil Speedpass™, additional Sentry Keys威,

or any other transponder-equipped components on

the same key chain will not cause a key-related

(transponder) fault unless the additional part is physi-

cally held against the ignition key being used when

starting the vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other

Radio Frequency (RF) electronics will not cause inter-

ference with this system.

All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have

been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Replacement Keys

NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle

electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.

Once a Sentry Key威is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot

be programmed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!

Always remove the Sentry Keys威from the vehicle

and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-

tended.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided

with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).

Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is

required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Du-

plication of keys may be performed at an authorized

dealer or by following the customer key programming

procedure. This procedure consists of programming a

blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one

that has never been programmed.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威Immobilizer

System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an

authorized dealer.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

Customer Key Programming

If you have two valid Sentry Keys威, you can program

new Sentry Keys威to the system by performing the

following procedure:

1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威Transponder blank(s)

to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.

2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn

the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three

seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the

ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first

key.

3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within

15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In

addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and

remove the second key.

4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威into the ignition switch.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within

60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.

In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.

To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle

Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and

then turn off.

The new Sentry Key威is programmed. The Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be pro-

grammed during this procedure.

Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you

do not have a programmed Sentry Key威, contact your

authorized dealer for details.

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized

dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys-

tem's memory. This will prevent the lost key from

starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be

reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an

authorized dealer at the time of service to be

reprogrammed.

General Information

The Sentry Key威system complies with FCC rules Part 15

and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is

subject to the following conditions:

•

This device may not cause harmful interference.

•

This device must accept any interference that may be

received, including interference that may cause undes-

ired operation.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF

EQUIPPED

This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors, hood,

liftgate, and ignition switch for unauthorized operation.

If something triggers the Vehicle Security Alarm the horn

will sound for 30 seconds and flash the lights for 60 sec-

onds. If the triggering device is not deactivated, the horn

will sound again after a five second delay for another

30 seconds. If the trigger remains present, this cycle will

repeat for up to five minutes.

To Set The Security Alarm

1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out

of the vehicle.

2. Lock the door using either the power door LOCK

switch or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter

and close all doors.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster

will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds. This

shows that the system is arming. During this period, if a

door is opened, the ignition switch is turned ON, or the

power door locks are unlocked in any manner, the

Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm. After

approximately 16 seconds, the Vehicle Security Light will

flash slowly. This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm

is fully armed.

To Disarm The System

1. Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter.

2. Starting the vehicle with a valid Sentry Key威will

disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. A valid key is one that

is programmed to your vehicle. A valid key will disarm

the Vehicle Security Alarm; an invalid key will allow the

engine to run for two seconds and stop.

Vehicle Security Alarm System Manual Override

The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the

doors using the manual door lock plunger.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED

This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and

liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to

66 ft (20 m) using a handheld Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to

be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked

with metal objects.

To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate

Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE

transmitter once to unlock the driver's door, or twice

within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The

turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock

signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.

Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All First Press

This feature lets you program the system to unlock either

the driver's door or all doors on the first press of the

UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the

current setting, proceed as follows:

•

For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC), refer to "RKE Unlock,"

under "Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable

Features)," under "Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)" in Section 4.

•

For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the

following steps:

1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed

RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer

than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK

button while still holding the LOCK button.

Three Button RKE Transmitter

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

2. Release both buttons at the same time.

3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-

ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter

with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the

key removed.

4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to

its previous setting.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-

ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the

Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle

Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.

Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle

Security Alarm.

Illuminated Approach — If Equipped

This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds

when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.

The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles

equipped with the EVIC. Refer to "Illuminated Ap-

proach," under "Personal Settings (Customer-

Programmable Features)," under "Electronic Vehicle In-

formation Center (EVIC)" in Section 4.

To Lock The Doors And Liftgate

Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-

ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights

will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the

signal.

Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors

are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be

turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,

proceed as follows:

•

For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to "Sound

Horn with Lock," under "Personal Settings

(Customer-Programmable Features)," under "Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)" in Section 4.

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

•

For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the

following steps:

1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-

mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 sec-

onds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding

the LOCK button.

2. Release both buttons at the same time.

Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing

the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition

switch in the LOCK position and the key removed.

4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to

its previous setting.

NOTE:

Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-

ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle

Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security

Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the

UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.

Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock/Unlock

This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when

the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-

ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change

the current setting, proceed as follows:

•

For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to "Flash

Light With Lock," under Personal Settings (Customer-

Programmable Features)," under "Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)" in Section 4.

•

For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the

following steps:

1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed

RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than

10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while

still holding the UNLOCK button.

2. Release both buttons at the same time.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-

ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter

with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the

key removed.

4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to

its previous setting.

NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-

ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle

Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security

Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the

UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security

Alarm.

Using The Panic Alarm

To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and

hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at

least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,

the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will

pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on.

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless

you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second

time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.

NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing

the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be

closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of

the system.

Programming Additional Transmitters

For more information, refer to Sentry Key "Customer Key

Programming" procedure in this section of the manual.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with

RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

following conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. This device must accept any interference that may be

received including interference that may cause undesired

operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal

distance, check for these two conditions:

1. Weak batteries in the RKE transmitter. The expected

life of batteries is five years.

2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station

tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile

or CB radios.

RKE Transmitter Battery Replacement

NOTE:

Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.

See "www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate."

The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.

1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,

remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons

facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the

RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the

elastomer seal during removal.

Separating RKE Transmitter Halves

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the

new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause

battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with

rubbing alcohol.

3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two

halves together.

NOTE: If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,

reinstall and tighten the screw until snug.

DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door Locks

Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from

inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door

is closed, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not

inside the vehicle before closing the door.

WARNING!

•

For personal security and safety in the event of an

accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as

well as when you park and leave the vehicle.

(Continued)

Manual Door Lock Plunger

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

•

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key

from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle. Do

not leave unattended children in the vehicle or

with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised

use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per-

sonal injuries and death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.

Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all

of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Power Door Locks

A power door lock switch is located on the driver's door

panel. Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors and

liftgate.

NOTE: To prevent from locking the key in the vehicle,

the power door lock switch will not operate when the key

is in the ignition and either front door is open. A chime

will sound as a reminder to remove the key.

Driver Power Door Lock Switch

1 - Unlock 2 - Lock

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped

The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power

door locks if all of the following conditions are met:

1. The Auto Lock feature is enabled.

2. The transmission is in gear.

3. All doors are closed.

4. The throttle is pressed.

5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h), and

6. The doors were not previously locked using the power

door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

transmitter.

Automatic Door Locks Programming

The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or

disabled as follows:

•

For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC), refer to "Personal Settings

(Customer-Programmable Features)" under "Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If

Equipped" in Section 4.

•

For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the

following procedure:

1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition

switch.

2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between

LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending

up in the LOCK position (do not start the engine).

3. Within 30 seconds, depress the power door LOCK

switch to lock the doors.

4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the

programming.

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to

its previous setting.

NOTE:

•

If you do not hear the chime it means that the system

did not enter the programming mode and you will

need to repeat the procedure.

•

Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in

accordance with local laws.

Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit

The doors will unlock automatically if:

1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-

abled.

2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed

returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).

3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.

4. The driver's door is opened.

5. The doors were not previously unlocked.

The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled.

Refer to "Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable

Features)" under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) — If Equipped" in Section 4.

For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Auto

Unlock Feature can be enabled or disabled by performing

the following procedure:

1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.

2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and

back to LOCK four times, ending up in the LOCK

position.

3. Depress the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock

the doors.

4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the

programming.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

NOTE:

•

If you do not hear the chime it means that the system

did not enter the programming mode and you will

need to repeat the procedure.

•

Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in

accordance with local laws.

Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming

The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be

enabled or disabled as follows:

•

For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to "Per-

sonal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)"

under "Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) –

If Equipped" in Section 4.

•

For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the

following procedure:

1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.

2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between

LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending

up in the LOCK position (do not start the engine).

3. Within 30 seconds, depress the power door UNLOCK

switch to unlock the doors.

4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the

programming.

5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to

its previous setting.

NOTE:

•

If you do not hear the chime it means that the system

did not enter the programming mode and you will

need to repeat the procedure.

•

Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in

accordance with local laws.

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Child-Protection Door Lock System (Rear Doors)

— If Equipped

Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate

to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.

Child-Protection Door Lock Location

Child-Protection Door Lock Function

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

Remember that the rear doors can only be opened

from the outside when the child protection locks are

engaged.

NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,

move the lock plunger up (unlocked position), roll down

the window and open the door with the outside door

handle.

POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED

Power Window Switches

The window controls on the driver's door trim panel

control all the door windows. There are single window

Power Window Switch Location

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

controls on each passenger door trim panel, which oper-

ate the passenger door windows. The window controls

will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON or

ACC position.

NOTE:

•

For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC), the power window

switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the

ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Open-

ing either front door will cancel this feature.

•

For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power

window switches will remain active for up to 10 min-

utes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK

position. Opening either front door will cancel this

feature. The time for this feature is programmable.

Refer to "Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit"

under "Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable

Features)" in the "Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-

ter (EVIC)," in Section 4 of this manual.

WARNING!

Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the

ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended

children, can become entrapped by the windows

while operating the power WINDOW switches. Such

entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

Auto Down

The driver's door window switch has an Auto Down

feature. Push the window switch past the first detent,

release, and the window will go down automatically. To

cancel the Auto Down movement, operate the switch in

either the up or down direction and release the switch.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

Window Lockout Switch

The window lockout switch on the driver's door allows

you to disable the window control on the other doors. To

disable the window controls on the other doors, press the

window LOCKOUT switch. To enable the window con-

trols, press the window LOCKOUT switch a second time.

LIFTGATE

NOTE: The key that is used to start the vehicle is also

used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate.

To unlock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock and

turn it to the right (manual lock models only). The liftgate

can also be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) transmitter or by activating the power door lock

switches located on the front doors. The central locking/

unlocking feature (if equipped) can also be activated

from the liftgate key cylinder.

Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed

without using the key. To open the liftgate, squeeze the

liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid

motion.

Window Lockout Switch

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

•

In the event of a power malfunction, or the RKE

transmitter is inoperative, insert the key into the

liftgate lock cylinder and turn to the right (manual

lock models only). Using the liftgate handle, pull the

liftgate open with one fluid motion.

•

Although the liftgate has no inside release mechanism,

the liftgate trim panel includes an opening with a

snap-in cap that provides access to release the latch in

the event of an electrical system malfunction.

WARNING!

•

Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-

ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your

passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep

the liftgate closed when you are operating the

vehicle.

•

If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,

make sure that all windows are closed, and the

climate control blower switch is set at high speed.

DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

Liftgate Latch Location

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.

However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-

ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when

opening the liftgate in cold weather.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS

Some of the most important safety features in your

vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front

and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front

airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if

equipped, side airbags for both the driver and front

passenger. If you will be carrying children too small for

adult-size seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature

also, can be used to hold infant and child restraint

systems.

Please pay close attention to the information in this

section. It tells you how to use your restraint system

properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as

possible.

WARNING!

In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer

much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled

up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other

passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.

Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are

buckled up properly.

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even

on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver

and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen

far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they

can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some

of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown

from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the

inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should

be belted at all times.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/

Shoulder Belts.

The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during

very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the

shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under

normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock

and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the

vehicle or being thrown out.

WARNING!

•

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed.

•

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

•

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

•

Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat

belts are designed to go around the large bones of

your body. These are the strongest parts of your

body and can take the forces of a collision the best.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make

your injuries in a collision much worse. You might

suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out

of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to

wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-

sengers safe, too.

•

Two people should never be belted into a single

seat belt. People belted together can crash into one

another in an accident, hurting one another badly.

Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more

than one person, no matter what their size.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and

adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front

seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out

the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as

necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

WARNING!

•

A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will

not protect you properly. The lap portion could

ride too high on your body, possibly causing

internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the

buckle nearest you.

•

A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.

In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,

increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat

belt snugly.

(Continued)

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

WARNING! (Continued)

•

A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-

ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of

the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck

injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause

internal injuries. Ribs aren't as strong as shoulder

bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that

your strongest bones will take the force in a

collision.

•

A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect

you from injury during a collision. You are more

likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not

wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt

are meant to be used together.

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up

on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,

tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt

reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.

Positioning Lap Belt

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

•

A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of

internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won't

be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across

your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as

possible and keep it snug.

•

A twisted belt can't do its job as well. In a collision

it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is

straight. If you can't straighten a belt in your

vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer and have

it fixed.

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor

will withdraw any slack in the belt.

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.

The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.

If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to

allow the belt to retract fully.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and

leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system

periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.

Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do

not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt

assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they

have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,

etc.).

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted

upward or downward to position the belt away from

your neck. Push the anchorage button to release the

anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that

fits you best.

As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will

prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average

you'll prefer a higher position. When you release the

anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that

it is locked in position.

Second Row Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating

Instructions

The second row center lap/shoulder belt features a

three-point seat belt with a mini-latch and buckle, which

allows the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor

when the seat is folded. The mini-buckle and shoulder

belt can then be stored out of the way in the right side

trim panel for added convenience.

Adjustable Anchorage

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. Remove the mini-latch and regular latch from its

stowed position in the right rear side trim panel. 2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the belt over the

seat.

3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head

restraint.

Mini-Latch Stowage

Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

4. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the mini-

latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a "click."

5. Sit back in the seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the

webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around

your lap.

6. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt

Connecting Mini-Latch To Buckle

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

7. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up

on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,

pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding

under the belt in a collision.

8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor

will withdraw any slack in the belt.

9. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.

Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled Detaching Mini-Latch and Buckle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

10. To disengage the mini-latch from the mini-buckle for

storage, insert the regular latch plate into the black

button on the top of the mini-buckle. The belt will

automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary,

slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt

to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate into the slot

provided in the trim panel.

Seat Belt Pretensioners

The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped

with pretensioning devices that are designed to automati-

cally remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of

a collision. These devices improve the performance of the

seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight about the

occupant in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size

occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat

belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be

worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-

straint Controller (ORC) (refer to information on Airbags

in this section). Like the front airbags, the pretensioners

are single use items. After a collision that is severe

enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both

must be replaced.

Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System

(BeltAlert姞)

If the driver's seat belt has not been buckled within

60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed

is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning

System (BeltAlert威 ) will alert the driver to buckle their seat

belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to

buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered,

BeltAlert威 will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt

Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver's seat belt

is buckled. BeltAlert威will be reactivated if the driver's

seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the

vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized

dealer or by following these steps:

NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first

60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON

or START position. Chrysler LLC does not recommend

deactivating the Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert威).

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and

buckle the driver or front passenger seat belt.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait

for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.

3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the

ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver or

front passenger seat belt at least three times within

10 seconds, ending with the seat belt buckled.

NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on

while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.

It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A

single chime will sound to signify that you have success-

fully completed the programming.

BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.

NOTE: Although BeltAlert威has been deactivated, the

Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while

the driver or front passenger seat belt remains

unbuckled.

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, and

when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if

equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized

dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This

extender should be used only if the existing belt is not

long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-

tender and store it.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

WARNING!

Using a seat belt extender when not needed can

increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use

when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn

low and snug, and in the recommended seating

positions. Remove and store the extender when not

needed.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts

throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is

the best way to keep the baby safe.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt

across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.

Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the

abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take

the force if there is a collision.

Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental

Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag

This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and

front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint

system. The driver's airbag is mounted in the center of

the steering wheel. The passenger's front airbag is

mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove com-

partment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the

airbag covers.

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal

regulations that allow less forceful deployment.

The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This

may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation

that are based on collision severity.

This vehicle may also be equipped with side curtain

airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next

to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain

airbags, they are located above the side windows. Their

covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.

Front Airbags and Knee Bolsters

1 — Driver and Passenger Airbag 2 — Knee Boltser

Side Curtain Airbag Location

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior

trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.

WARNING!

•

Do not put anything on or around the front airbag

covers or attempt to manually open them. You may

damage the airbags and you could be injured

because the airbags are no longer functional.

These protective covers for the airbag cushions are

designed to open only when the airbags are inflat-

ing.

•

If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain

airbags, do not stack luggage or other cargo up

high enough to block the location of the side

curtain airbag. The area where the side curtain

airbag is located should remain free from any

obstructions.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

•

If your vehicle is equipped with side curtain

airbags, do not have any accessory items installed

which will alter the roof, including adding a

sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that

require permanent attachments (bolts or screws)

for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill

into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.

•

Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee impact

bolster in any way.

•

Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact

bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band

radios etc.

NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat

hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the

proper performance of the side curtain airbags.

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the

instrument panel knee impact bolsters to provide im-

proved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side

curtain airbags also work with seat belts to improve

occupant protection.

The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types

of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to

severe frontal collisions.

If your vehicle is so equipped, the side curtain airbag on

the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to

severe side collisions. However, even in collisions where

the airbags deploy, you need the seat belts to keep you in

the correct position for the airbags to protect you prop-

erly.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize

the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.

1. Children 12 years old and younger should ride buck-

led up in the rear seat.

2. Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER

ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front

airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe injury

or death to infants in that position.

3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle

seat belt properly (refer to information on Child Restraint

in this section) should be secured in the rear seat in child

restraints or belt-positioning booster seats.

4. Older children who do not use child restraints or

belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buck-

led up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the

shoulder belt behind them or under their arms.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

5. If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front

passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the

seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child

restraint (refer to information on Child Restraint in this

section).

6. You should read the instructions provided with your

child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

7. All occupants should use their seat belts properly.

8. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved

back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate.

9. If your vehicle has side curtain airbags do not lean

against the doors, as airbags will inflate forcefully into

the space between you and the door.

10. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be

modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the

Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the ⬙If

You Need Customer Assistance⬙section in this manual.

WARNING!

•

Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work

with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In

some collisions, the airbags won't deploy at all.

Always wear your seat belts even though you have

airbags.

•

Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument

panel during airbag deployment could cause seri-

ous injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,

comfortably extending your arms to reach the

steering wheel or instrument panel.

•

If the vehicle has side curtain airbags, they also

need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door

or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Airbag System Components

The airbag system consists of the following:

•

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

•

Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (if equipped)

•

Airbag Warning Light

•

Driver Airbag

•

Front Passenger Airbag

•

Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above side win-

dows (if equipped)

•

Steering Wheel and Column

•

Instrument Panel

•

Interconnecting Wiring

•

Seat Belt Reminder Light

•

Knee Impact Bolsters

•

Front Acceleration Sensors

•

Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners

How The Airbag System Works

•

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines

if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the

airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are de-

signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation

from direction provided by the ORC. This ORC will

detect rollover.

•

The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic

parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in

the START or ON positions. These include all of the

items listed above except the knee impact bolster, the

instrument panel, and the steering wheel and column.

If the key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position,

or not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and will

not inflate.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

•

The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning

Light in the instrument panel for six to eight

seconds as a self-check when the ignition is

first turned on. After the self-check, the

Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects

a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the

Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continu-

ously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on

again after initial start up.

WARNING!

Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instru-

ment panel could mean you won't have the airbags to

protect you in a collision. If the light does not come

on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes

on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right

away.

•

The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag/Inflator

Units are located in the center of the steering wheel

and the passenger side of the instrument panel. When

the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags, it

signals the inflator units. A large quantity of nontoxic

gas is generated to inflate the front airbags. Different

airbag inflation rates may be possible based on colli-

sion severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover, and

the upper passenger side of the instrument panel

separate and fold out of the way, as the bags inflate to

their full size. The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70

milliseconds. This is about half of the time that it takes

to blink your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate while

helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. The

driver's front airbag gas is vented through vent holes

in the sides of the airbag. The passenger's front airbag

gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the

airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with

your control of the vehicle.

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

•

The Side Impact SRS Side Curtain Airbag is designed

to activate only in certain side collisions. When the

ORC (with side impact option) detects a collision

requiring the side curtain airbag to inflate, it signals

the inflators on the crash side of the vehicle. A quantity

of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain

airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the

outside edge of the headliner out of the way and

covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30

milliseconds (about one quarter of the time that it

takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure

you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if

items are positioned in the area where the side curtain

airbag inflates. This especially applies to children. The

side curtain airbag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick

when it is inflated.

•

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of

the driver and the front passenger, and position every-

one for the best interaction with the front airbag.

If A Deployment Occurs

The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ORC

detects a moderate-to-severe collision, to help restrain the

driver and front passenger, and then to immediately

deflate.

NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to

need airbag protection will not activate the system. This

does not mean something is wrong with the airbag

system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any

or all of the following may occur:

•

The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-

sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front

passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The

abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those

you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium

floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.

They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

However, if you haven't healed significantly within a

few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor

immediately.

•

As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like

particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the

process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag

inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,

eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,

rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat

irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,

see your doctor. If these particles settle on your

clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instruc-

tions for cleaning.

•

It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the

airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in

another collision, the airbags will not be in place to

protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed airbags can't protect you in another colli-

sion. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment,

with the vehicle stopped, and the vehicle communication

network intact, and the power intact, the Enhanced Acci-

dent Response System performs the following functions:

•

Cuts off fuel to the engine.

•

Flashes hazard lights.

•

Turns on the interior lights, which remain on as long as

the battery has power or until the ignition key is

removed.

•

Unlocks the doors automatically.

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Maintaining Your Airbag System

WARNING!

•

Modifications to any part of the airbag system

could cause it to fail when you need it. You could

be injured because the airbags are not there to

protect you. Do not modify the components or

wiring, including adding any kind of badges or

stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the

upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do

not modify the front bumper, vehicle body struc-

ture, or frame.

•

You need proper knee impact protection in a

collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket

equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster.

•

It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the

airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who

works on your vehicle that it has airbags.

Airbag Warning Light

You will want to have the airbags ready to

inflate for your protection in an impact. While

the airbag system is designed to be mainte-

nance free, if any of the following occurs, have

an authorized dealer service the system promptly:

•

The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers

during the six to eight seconds when the ignition

switch is first turned on.

•

The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight

second interval.

•

The light flickers or comes on and remains on while

driving.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to

record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-

eters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the

moment of airbag deployment, or near-deployment, and

up to a quarter second of high-speed deceleration data

during and/or after airbag deployment or near-

deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag

deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavail-

able.

NOTE:

1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag

sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-

tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag

deployment.

2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be

recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).

In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-

plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be

used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the

possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order

to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition

to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC, such

investigations may be requested by customers, insurance

carriers, government officials, and professional crash

researchers, such as those associated with universities,

and with hospital and insurance organizations.

In the event that an investigation is undertaken by

Chrysler LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its

designated representative will first obtain permission of

the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually

the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the elec-

tronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a

court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant).

A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

upon request. General data that does not identify par-

ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo-

ration in aggregate crash databases, such as those main-

tained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of

a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a

particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confi-

dentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by

Chrysler LLC to any third party except when:

1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data

with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,

provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter

preserved

2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC

product

3. Requested by police under a legal warrant

4. Otherwise required by law

Data parameters that may be recorded:

•

Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for

electronically-controlled safety systems, including the

airbag system

•

Airbag disable light status (if equipped)

•

⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition

cycles and vehicle mileage)

•

Airbag deployment level (if applicable)

•

Impact acceleration and angle

•

Seat belt status

•

Brake status (service and parking brakes)

•

Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)

•

Engine control status (including engine speed)

•

Transmission gear selection

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

•

Cruise control status

•

Traction/stability control status

•

Tire pressure monitoring system status

Child Restraint

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all

times — babies and children, too. Every state in the

United States and all Canadian provinces require that

small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the

law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years and younger should ride properly

buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash

statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in

the rear seats, rather than in the front seat.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,

can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force

required to hold even an infant on your lap could

become so great that you could not hold the child, no

matter how strong you are. The child and others

could be badly injured. Any child riding in your

vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child's

size.

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Infants And Small Children

There are different sizes and types of restraints for

children from newborn size to the child almost large

enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child

seat owner's manual to ensure you have the correct seat

for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your

child:

•

Safety experts recommend that children ride

rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least

one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types

of child restraints can be used rearward-facing infant

carriers and ⬙ convertible⬙ child seats. Both types of

child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/

shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage

system.

•

The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the

vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up

to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ⬙ Convertible⬙ child seats can be

used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the

vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher

weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than

infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing

by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9kg) but are

younger than one year old.

•

Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in

the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger

airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe

injury or death to infants in this position.

•

Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who

are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the

vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible

child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for

children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who

are older than one year. These child seats are also held

in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH

child restraint anchorage system.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

•

The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-

ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small

to fit the vehicle's seat belts properly. If the child

cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's cushion

while the child's back is against the seatback; they

should use a belt positioning booster seat. The child

and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/

shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped with a

front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap

portion.)

NOTE: For additional information refer to

www.seatcheck.org.

WARNING!

•

Improper installation can lead to failure of an

infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a

collision. The child could be badly injured or

killed. Follow the manufacturer's directions ex-

actly when installing an infant or child restraint.

•

A rearward-facing child restraint should only be

used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re-

straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy-

ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or

fatal injury to the infant.

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child

restraint:

•

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it

has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety

Standards. We also recommend that you make sure

that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle

where you will use it, before you buy it.

•

The restraint must be appropriate for your child's

weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for

weight and height limits.

•

Carefully follow the instructions that come with the

restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may

not work when you need it.

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are

equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of

seatbelts are designed to keep the lap portion of the

seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not

necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a

ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the

retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the

retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to

"Automatic Locking Mode".

•

In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the

lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the

buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path

opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate

from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the

belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate

into the buckle with the release button facing out.

•

If the belt still can't be tightened, or if pulling and

pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect

the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate

around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle

again. If you still can't make the child restraint secure,

try a different seating position.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

•

Buckle the child into the seat according to the child

restraint manufacturer's directions.

•

When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the

vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.

Don't leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or

collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and

cause serious personal injury.

Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR)

To operate the switchable retractor, pull the belt from the

retractor until there is enough allowance to pass it

through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into

the buckle. Then pull on the belt until it is all removed

from the retractor. Allow the belt to return into the

retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap

portion about the child restraint. Follow the instructions

of the child restraint manufacture.

NOTE: To reset this feature you must let all of the belt

webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to

pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been

returned back into the retractor.

Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-

age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower An-

chors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system pro-

vides for the installation of the child restraint without

using the vehicle seat belt. All three rear seating positions

have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating

LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible, webbing-

mounted lower attachments. Child seats with fixed lower

attachments must be installed in the outboard positions

only. Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment,

NEVER install LATCH-compatible child seats such that

two seats share a common lower anchorage. If you are

installing LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent

rear seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

the vehicle's seat belt for the outboard position, but you

must use the vehicle's seat belt at the center position. If

your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can

only install the child restraints using the vehicle's seat

belts. Please refer to Installing the Child Restraint System

for typical installation instructions.

Child restraints systems having attachments designed to

connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child

restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection

to the top tether anchorage have been available for some

time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will

provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older

products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for

most older vehicles.

Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to

passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child

restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-

ages will continue to have features for installation in

vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also

have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage

of all of the available attachments provided with your

child restraint in any vehicle.

Rear Seat LATCH

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to

install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts

not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out

of reach of children. It is recommended that before

installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the

seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of

reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child

restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt

behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the

child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should

stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.

Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are

not toys and should not be played with, and never leave

your child unattended in the vehicle.

Installing the Child Restraint System

We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the

manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,

but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with

separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or

connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the

strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some

rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped

with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting

the tension in the strap.

In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower

and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the

hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages.

The tether strap should be routed under the center of the

head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the

rear of the seatback. Then tighten all three straps as you

push the child restraint rearward and downward into the

seat.

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we

have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-

tions that come with the child restraint system.

NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com-

patible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.

WARNING!

An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to

increased head motion and possible injury to the

child. Use only the anchor position directly behind

the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether

strap.

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt

comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend

over the front of the seat when their back is against the

seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.

•

Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.

•

The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug

as possible.

•

Check belt fit periodically. A child's squirming or

slouching can move the belt out of position.

Rear Seat Tether Anchors

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

•

If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the

child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a

child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind

their back.

Transporting Pets

Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.

An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly

injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in

a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses

or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine in

your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).

After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or

55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the

limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.

Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-

mental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a

high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil

changes should be consistent with anticipated climate

conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.

The recommended viscosity and quality grades are

shown under "Engine Oil", under "Maintenance Proce-

dures" in section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT

OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE

USED.

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few

thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be

considered as a normal part of the break-in and not

interpreted as an indication of difficulty.

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

SAFETY TIPS

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon

monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can

eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, fol-

low these safety tips:

Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined

areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or

out of the area.

If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine

running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force

outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

WARNING!

If you are required to drive with the deck lid/liftgate

open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the

climate control blower switch is set at high speed.

DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,

frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced

immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a

collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after

a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,

torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt

or retractor condition, replace the belt.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

Airbag Warning Light

The light should come on and remain on for six to eight

seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first

turned ON. If the LED is not lit during starting, have it

checked. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while

driving, have the system checked by an authorized

dealer.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place

the blower control on high speed. You should be able to

feel the air directed against the windshield. See your

authorized dealer for service if your defroster is

inoperable.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear

patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects

lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or

cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the

tires (including spare) for proper pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights

while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high

beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

Fluid Leaks

Check the area under the vehicle after overnight parking

for fuel, engine coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if

gasoline fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid,

transmission fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the

cause should be located and corrected immediately.

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵Mirrors .............................. 75

▫Inside Day/Night Mirror ................ 75

▫Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror —

If Equipped .......................... 76

▫Outside Mirror — Driver's Side ........... 76

▫Outside Mirror — Passenger's Side ......... 76

▫Power Mirrors — If Equipped ............ 77

▫Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped ............ 79

▫Sun Visor Sliding Feature ................ 79

䡵Hands-Free Communication (UConnect 威)—

If Equipped ............................ 79

▫Operation ........................... 81

▫Phone Call Features .................... 89

▫UConnect 威System Features .............. 92

▫Advanced Phone Connectivity ............ 97

▫Things You Should Know About Your

UConnect威System ..................... 99

▫General Information ................... 107

䡵Voice Recognition System (VR) —

If Equipped ........................... 107

▫Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation . . . 107

▫Commands ......................... 109

▫Voice Training ....................... 112

䡵Seats ............................... 112

▫Front Seat Adjustment ................. 112

▫Manual Seat Height Adjustment —

If Equipped ......................... 113

▫Manual Lumbar — If Equipped .......... 114

▫Driver's Seatback Recline ............... 114

▫Adjustable Head Restraints .............. 115

▫Heated Seats — If Equipped ............. 116

▫Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat ........... 117

▫Folding Rear Seat .................... 118

䡵To Open And Close The Hood ............. 119

䡵Lights .............................. 121

▫Multifunction Lever ................... 121

▫Headlights, Parking Lights And Instrument

Panel Lights ........................ 121

▫Lights-On Reminder .................. 122

▫Fog Lights — If Equipped .............. 122

▫Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —

If Equipped ......................... 123

▫Turn Signals ........................ 123

▫High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ....... 124

▫Flash-To-Pass ....................... 124

▫Off-Road Lights — If Equipped .......... 125

72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫Map/Reading Lights .................. 126

䡵Windshield Wipers And Washers .......... 127

▫Windshield Wiper Operation ............ 127

▫Intermittent Wiper System .............. 128

▫Windshield Washers ................... 128

▫Mist Feature ........................ 129

䡵Tilt Steering Column ................... 130

䡵Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ...... 131

▫To Activate ......................... 131

▫To Set At A Desired Speed .............. 131

▫To Deactivate ....................... 132

▫To Resume Speed .................... 132

▫To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 132

▫Manual Transaxle .................... 133

▫To Accelerate For Passing ............... 133

䡵Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 134

▫Programming HomeLink 威.............. 135

▫Gate Operator/Canadian Programming ..... 138

▫Using HomeLink 威.................... 138

▫Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威

Button ............................ 139

▫Security ........................... 139

▫Troubleshooting Tips .................. 139

▫General Information ................... 140

䡵Power Sunroof — If Equipped ............. 140

▫Opening The Sunroof .................. 141

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73

▫Closing The Sunroof .................. 142

▫Pinch Protect Feature .................. 142

▫Pinch Protect Override ................. 142

▫Venting Sunroof — Express ............. 143

▫Sunshade Operation ................... 143

▫Wind Buffeting ...................... 143

▫Sunroof Maintenance .................. 143

▫Ignition Off Operation ................. 143

䡵Electrical Power Outlets ................. 144

䡵Power Inverter — If Equipped ............ 145

䡵Storage ............................. 147

▫Glove Compartment And Storage Bin ...... 147

▫Door Storage — If Equipped ............. 148

䡵Cupholders .......................... 149

䡵Console Features ...................... 150

䡵Cargo Area Features .................... 151

▫Cargo Light/Removable Self-Recharging

Flashlight — If Equipped ............... 151

▫Cargo Cover — If Equipped ............. 152

▫Removable Load Floor ................. 153

▫Cargo Tie-Down Loops ................ 153

▫Fold Down Speakers — If Equipped ....... 154

䡵Rear Window Features .................. 154

▫Rear Window Wiper/Washer ............ 154

▫Rear Window Defroster ................ 155

74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror

A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and

vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on

the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small

control under the mirror to the night position (toward the

rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set

in the day position (toward the windshield).

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75

Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror — If Equipped

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare

from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or

off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light

next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the

dimming feature is activated.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never

spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.

Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the

mirror clean.

Outside Mirror — Driver's Side

Adjust the flat (drivers side) outside mirror so you can

just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror

closest to the vehicle with your head close to the door

glass.

Outside Mirror — Passenger's Side

Adjust the convex (passenger side) outside mirror so you

can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the

mirror closest to the vehicle with your head close to the

center of the vehicle.

Automatic Dimming Mirror

76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side

convex mirror will look smaller and farther away

than they really are. Relying too much on your

passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with

another vehicle or other object. Use your inside

mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle

seen in this convex mirror.

Power Mirrors — If Equipped

The control for the power mirrors is located on the

drivers door trim panel.

Power Mirror Control

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77

To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left

or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand

in the direction you want the mirror to move. When

finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the

center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side

convex mirror will look smaller and farther away

than they really are. Relying too much on your

passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with

another vehicle or other object. Use your inside

mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle

seen in this convex mirror.

Mirror Directions

78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped

To use the vanity mirror, rotate the sun visor down and

swing the mirror cover upward.

Sun Visor Sliding Feature

The sun visors may be extended out to provide more

coverage of the side glass.

HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect姞 )—

IF EQUIPPED

NOTE: The sales code RER and REU radios contain an

integrated Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)

system. Refer to your "Navigation User's Manual" for

UConnect威 system operating instructions for these ra-

dios. Radio sales code can be located on the lower right

corner of the Radio faceplate.

UConnect威 is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle

communications system. UConnect威allows you to dial a

phone number with your cellular phone using simple

voice commands (e.g., ⬙ Call" ѧ"Mike" ѧ "Work⬙ or ⬙Dial"

ѧ"248-555-1212 ⬙). Your cellular phone's audio is trans-

mitted through your vehicle's audio system; the system

will automatically mute your radio when using the

UConnect威system.

Vanity Mirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79

NOTE: The UConnect威system requires a cellular phone

equipped with the Bluetooth威⬙ Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Ver-

sion 0.96 or higher. See the UConnect威website for

supported phones.

NOTE: For UConnect威customer support, visit the

following websites:

•

www.chrysler.com/uconnect

•

www.dodge.com/uconnect

•

www.jeep.com/uconnect

•

or call 1–877–855–8400

UConnect威 allows you to transfer calls between the

system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your

vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone

for private conversation.

The UConnect威system is driven through your

Bluetooth威 "Hands-Free Profile" cellular phone.

UConnect威 features Bluetooth威technology - the global

standard that enables different electronic devices to con-

nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so

UConnect威 works no matter where you stow your cellu-

lar phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long

as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the

vehicle's UConnect威system. The UConnect威system

allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the

system. Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be

used with the system at a time. The system is available in

English, Spanish, or French languages.

Phone Button

The rearview mirror contains the microphone

for the system (depending on the type of

mirror and radio equipped), and either the

radio or the mirror has the two control buttons

(PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button)

that will enable you to access the system.

80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Voice Recognition Button

Actual button location may vary with the ra-

dio. The individual buttons are described in the

"Operation" section.

The UConnect威system can be used with any Hands-Free

Profile certified Bluetooth威cellular phone. See the

UConnect威 website for supported phones. If your cellu-

lar phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset

Profile) you may not be able to use any UConnect威

features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the

phone manufacturer for details.

The UConnect威system is fully integrated with the vehi-

cle's audio system. The volume of the UConnect威system

can be adjusted either from the radio volume control

knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right

switch), if so equipped.

The radio display will be used for visual prompts from

the UConnect威system such as ⬙ CELL⬙ or caller ID on

certain radios.

Operation

Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect威

system and to navigate through the UConnect威menu

structure. Voice commands are required after most

UConnect威 system prompts. You will be prompted for a

specific command and then guided through the available

options.

•

Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for

the beep, which follows the ⬙ Ready⬙ prompt or another

prompt.

•

For certain operations, compound commands can be

used. For example, instead of saying ⬙ Setup⬙ and then

⬙Phone Pairing, ⬙ the following compound command

can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81

•

For each feature explanation in this section, only the

combined form of the voice command is given. You

can also break the commands into parts and say each

part of the command when you are asked for it. For

example, you can use the combined form voice com-

mand ⬙ Phonebook New Entry,⬙or you can break the

combined form command into two voice commands:

⬙Phonebook ⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙Please remember, the

UConnect威 system works best when you talk in a

normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone

sitting a few feet/meters away from you.

Voice Command Tree

Refer to "Voice Tree" in this section.

Help Command

If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to

know your options at any prompt, say ⬙ Help⬙following

the beep. The UConnect威system will play all the options

at any prompt if you ask for help.

To activate the UConnect威system from idle, simply press

the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for

directions. All UConnect威 system sessions begin with a

press of the PHONE button on the radio control head.

Cancel Command

At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙ Cancel⬙and

you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a

few instances the system will take you back to the

previous menu.

Pair (Link) UConnect威System to a Cellular Phone

To begin using your UConnect威system, you must pair

your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.

To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-

ence your cellular phone Owner's Manual. The

UConnect威 website may also provide detailed instruc-

tions for pairing.

82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The following are general phone to UConnect威system

pairing instructions:

•

Press the PHONE button to begin.

•

After the ⬙ Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say

⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙

•

When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙and

follow the audible prompts.

•

You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-

fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to

enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any

four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN

after the initial pairing process.

•

For identification purposes, you will be prompted to

give the UConnect威system a name for your cellular

phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be

given a unique phone name.

•

You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a

priority level between one and seven, with one being

the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular

phones to your UConnect威system. However, at any

given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,

connected to your UConnect威system. The priority

allows the UConnect威system to know which cellular

phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the

vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three

and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the

UConnect威 system will use the priority three cellular

phone when you make a call. You can select to use a

lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to

⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity ⬙ in this section).

Dial by Saying a Number

•

Press the PHONE button to begin.

•

After the ⬙ Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say

⬙Dial.⬙

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83

•

The system will prompt you to say the number you

want to call.

•

For example, you can say ⬙ 234-567-8901⬙.

•

The UConnect威system will confirm the phone num-

ber and then dial. The number will appear in the

display of certain radios.

Call by Saying a Name

•

Press the PHONE button to begin.

•

After the ⬙ Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say

"Call.⬙

•

The system will prompt you to say the name of the

person you want to call.

•

After the ⬙ Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say

the name of the person you want to call. For example,

you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙where John Doe is a previ-

ously stored name entry in the UConnect威phonebook

or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a

name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your

UConnect威Phonebook,⬙ in the phonebook.

•

The UConnect威system will confirm the name and

then dial the corresponding phone number, which

may appear in the display of certain radios.

Add Names to Your UConnect威Phonebook

NOTE: Adding names to the UConnect威phonebook is

recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.

•

Press the PHONE button to begin.

•

After the ⬙ Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say

⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙

•

When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of

long names helps the voice recognition and it is

recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙or

⬙Robert ⬙ instead of ⬙Bob.⬙

84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

•

When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,

⬙Home, ⬙⬙ Work,⬙⬙ Mobile,⬙ or ⬙ Pager⬙ ). This will allow

you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook

entry, if desired.

•

When prompted, recite the phone number for the

phonebook entry that you are adding.

After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-

book, you will be given the opportunity to add more

phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the

main menu.

The UConnect威system will allow you to enter up to 32

names in the phonebook with each name having up to

four associated phone numbers and designations. Each

language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible

only in that language. In addition, if equipped and

supported by your phone, UConnect威automatically

downloads your mobile phone's phonebook.

Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook

Transfer From Mobile Phone

If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,

UConnect威 automatically downloads names (text names)

and number entries from the mobile phone's phonebook.

Specific Bluetooth威Phones with Phone Book Access

Profile may support this feature. See UConnect威website

for supported phones.

•

To call a name from downloaded (or UConnect威)

Phonebook, follow the procedure in "Call by Saying a

Name" section.

•

Automatic download and update, if supported, begins

as soon as the Bluetooth威wireless phone connection is

made to the UConnect威, for example, after you start

the vehicle.

•

A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-

loaded and updated every time a phone is connected

to the UConnect威.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85

•

Depending on the maximum number of entries down-

loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest

downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available,

the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use.

•

Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile

phone is accessible.

•

Only the mobile phone's phonebook is downloaded.

SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-

book.

•

This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or

deleted on the UConnect威. These can only be edited on

the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and

updated to UConnect威on the next phone connection.

Phonebook Download — Single Entry

If equipped and supported by your phone, UConnect威

allows the user to download entries from their phone via

Bluetooth威 . To use this feature, press the PHONE button and

say "Phonebook Download." The system prompts, "Ready

to accept "V" card entry via Bluetooth威…" The system is

now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone

using the Bluetooth威Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please

see your phone Owner's Manual for specific instructions on

how to send these entries from your phone.

NOTE:

•

The phone handset must support Bluetooth威OBEX

transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.

•

Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they

are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,

and you may see a message on the phone display that

the Bluetooth威link is busy. In this case, the user must

first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to

the UConnect威system, and then send the address

book entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone

Owner's Manual for specific instructions on how to

drop the Bluetooth威connection.

86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

•

If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it

will only use the first 24 characters.

Edit UConnect威Phonebook Entries

NOTE:

•

Editing names in the phonebook is recommended

when the vehicle is not in motion.

•

Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be

deleted or edited.

•

Press the PHONE button to begin.

•

After the ⬙ Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say

⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙

•

You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook

entry that you wish to edit.

•

Next, choose the number designation (home, work,

mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.

•

When prompted, recite the new phone number for the

phonebook entry that you are editing.

After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,

you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in

the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return

to the main menu.

⬙Phonebook Edit ⬙ can be used to add another phone

number to a name entry that already exists in the

phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a

mobile and a home number, but you can add "John

Doe's" work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙

feature.

Delete UConnect威Phonebook Entry

NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended

when the vehicle is not in motion.

•

Press the PHONE button to begin.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87

•

After the ⬙ Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say

⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙

•

After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will

then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish

to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook

entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List

Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook

from which you choose. To select one of the entries

from the list, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button

while the UConnect威system is playing the desired

entry and say ⬙ Delete.⬙

•

After you enter the name, the UConnect威system will

ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,

work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you

wish to delete.

•

Note that only the phonebook entry in the current

language is deleted.

•

Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be

deleted or edited.

Delete/Erase "All" UConnect威Phonebook Entries

•

Press the PHONE button to begin.

•

After the ⬙ Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say

⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙

•

The UConnect威system will ask you to verify that you

wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.

•

After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be

deleted.

•

Note that only the phonebook in the current language

is deleted.

•

Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be

deleted or edited.

88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

List All Names in the UConnect威Phonebook

•

Press the PHONE button to begin.

•

After the ⬙ Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say

⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙

•

The UConnect威system will play the names of all the

phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-

book entries, if available.

•

To call one of the names in the list, press the VOICE

RECOGNITION button during the playing of the

desired name, and say ⬙ Call.⬙

NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙ Edit⬙ or ⬙ Delete⬙

operations at this point.

•

The UConnect威system will then prompt you as to the

number designation you wish to call.

•

The selected number will be dialed.

Phone Call Features

The following features can be accessed through the

UConnect威 system if the feature(s) are available on your

cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service

plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be

accessed through the UConnect威system. Check with

your cellular service provider for the features that you

have.

Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call

Currently in Progress

When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the

UConnect威 system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-

tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the

call. Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject

the call, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear

a single beep, indicating that the incoming call was

rejected.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89

Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call

Currently in Progress

If a call is currently in progress and you have another

incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for

call waiting that you normally hear when using your

cellular phone. Press the PHONE button to place the

current call on hold and answer the incoming call.

NOTE: The UConnect威system compatible phones in

the market today do not support rejecting an incoming

call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user

can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.

Making a Second Call While Current Call is in

Progress

To make a second call while you are currently on a call,

press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say ⬙ Dial⬙

or ⬙ Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook

entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while

the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call,

refer to ⬙Toggling Between Calls⬙in this section. To

combine two calls, refer to ⬙Conference Call⬙in this

section.

Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold

To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you

hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.

To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the

PHONE button until you hear a single beep.

Toggling Between Calls

If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),

press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep,

indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls

have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a

time.

90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Conference Call

When two calls are in progress (one active and one on

hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear

a double beep indicating that the two calls have been

joined into one conference call.

Three-Way Calling

To initiate three-way calling, press the VOICE RECOG-

NITION button while a call is in progress, and make a

second phone call, as described under ⬙Making a Second

Call While Current Call is in Progress.⬙After the second

call has established, press and hold the PHONE button

until you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls

have been joined into one conference call.

Call Termination

To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE

button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if

there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.

If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on

hold may not become active automatically. This is cell

phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press

and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.

Redial

•

Press the PHONE button to begin.

•

After the ⬙ Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say

⬙Redial.⬙

•

The UConnect威system will call the last number that

was dialed from your cellular phone.

NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the

UConnect威system.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91

Call Continuation

Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the

UConnect威 system after the vehicle ignition key has been

switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-

able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:

•

After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can

continue on the UConnect威system either until the call

ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates

cessation of the call on the UConnect威system and

transfer of the call to the mobile phone.

•

After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can

continue on the UConnect威system for a certain dura-

tion, after which the call is automatically transferred

from the UConnect威system to the mobile phone.

•

An active call is automatically transferred to the

mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.

UConnect姞 System Features

Language Selection

To change the language that the UConnect威 system is

using:

•

Press the PHONE button to begin.

•

After the ⬙ Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say

the name of the language you wish to switch to

English, Espanol, or Francais.

•

Continue to follow the system prompts to complete

the language selection.

After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and

voice commands will be in that language.

NOTE: After every UConnect威language change opera-

tion, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is

usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific

and usable across all languages.

92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Emergency Assistance

If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is

reachable:

•

Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency

number for your area.

If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect威system

is operational, you may reach the emergency number as

follows:

•

Press the PHONE button to begin.

•

After the ⬙ Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say

⬙Emergency ⬙ and the UConnect 威 system will instruct

the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-

ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and

Mexico.

NOTE:

•

The emergency number dialed is based on the country

where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and

Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may

not be applicable with the available cellular service

and area.

•

If supported, this number may be programmable on

some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button

and say 'Setup', followed by 'Emergency'.

•

The UConnect威system does slightly lower your

chances of successfully making a phone call as to that

for the cell phone directly.

WARNING!

Your phone must be turned on and paired to the

UConnect威 system to allow use of this vehicle feature

in emergency situations, when the cell phone has

network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect威

system.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93

Towing Assistance

If you need towing assistance:

•

Press the PHONE button to begin.

•

After the ⬙ Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say

⬙Towing Assistance.⬙

NOTE:

•

The towing assistance number dialed is based on the

country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-

2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-

3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside

Mexico City in Mexico).

•

If supported, this number may be programmable on

some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button

and say "Setup"', followed by "Towing Assistance".

Paging

To learn how to page, refer to ⬙ Working with Automated

Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of

certain companies, which time out a little too soon to

work properly with the UConnect威system.

Voice Mail Calling

To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙ Working

with Automated Systems.⬙

Working with Automated Systems

This method is used in instances where one generally has

to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while

navigating through an automated telephone system.

You can use your UConnect威system to access a voice

mail system or an automated service, such as a paging

service or automated customer service line. Some ser-

vices require immediate response selection. In some

instances, that may be too quick for use of the UConnect威

system.

94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

When calling a number with your UConnect威system

that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone

sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can press

the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the sequence

you wish to enter, followed by the word ⬙ Send.⬙For

example, if required to enter your PIN followed with a

pound, (3746#),youcanpresstheVOICE RECOGNI-

TION button and say, ⬙ 3746# Send.⬙ Saying a number,

or sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙ Send,⬙ is also to be

used for navigating through an automated customer

service center menu structure, and to leave a number on

a pager.

You can also send stored UConnect威phonebook entries

as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager

entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to

call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button

and say, "Send." The system will prompt you to enter the

name or number and say the name of the phonebook

entry you wish to send. The UConnect威 system will then

send the corresponding phone number associated with

the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.

NOTE:

•

You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone

network configurations. This is normal.

•

Some paging and voice mail systems have system time

out settings that are too short and may not allow the

use of this feature.

Barge In - Overriding Prompts

The "Voice Recognition" button can be used when you

wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice

recognition command immediately. For example, if a

prompt is asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear

a...,⬙ you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button

and say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙to select that option without

having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95

Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF

Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system

from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect威sys-

tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).

•

Press the PHONE button to begin.

•

After the ⬙ Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say

⬙Setup Confirmations. ⬙ The UConnect 威 system will

play the current confirmation prompt status and you

will be given the choice to change it.

Phone and Network Status Indicators

If available on the radio and/or on a premium display

such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by

your cellular phone, the UConnect威system will provide

notification to inform you of your phone and network

status when you are attempting to make a phone call

using UConnect威. The status is given for roaming, net-

work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.

Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad

You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone

keypad and still use the UConnect威system (while dial-

ing via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise

caution and take precautionary safety measures). By

dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威cellular

phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle's

audio system. The UConnect威system will work the same

as if you dial the number using voice recognition.

NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send

the dial ring to the UConnect威system to play it on the

vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this

situation, after successfully dialing a number the user

may feel that the call did not go through even though the

call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will

hear the audio.

96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)

When you mute the UConnect威system, you will still be

able to hear the conversation coming from the other

party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In

order to mute the UConnect威system:

•

Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.

•

Following the beep, say ⬙ Mute.⬙

In order to un-mute the UConnect威system:

•

Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.

•

Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙

Advanced Phone Connectivity

Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone

The UConnect威system allows ongoing calls to be trans-

ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect威system

without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call

from your UConnect威paired cellular phone to the

UConnect威 system or vice versa, press the VOICE REC-

OGNITION button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙

Connect or Disconnect Link Between the

UConnect威 System and Cellular Phone

Your cellular phone can be paired with many different

electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙ connected⬙

with one electronic device at a time.

If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威

connection between a UConnect威paired cellular phone

and the UConnect威system, follow the instructions de-

scribed in your cellular phone User's Manual.

List Paired Cellular Phone Names

•

Press the PHONE button to begin.

•

After the "Ready" prompt and the following beep, say

"Setup Phone Pairing."

•

When prompted, say ⬙ List Phones.⬙

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97

•

The UConnect威system will play the phone names of

all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to

the lowest priority. To "select" or "delete" a paired

phone being announced, press the VOICE RECOGNI-

TION button and say "Select" or "Delete." Also, see

the next two sections for an alternate way to "select"

or "delete" a paired phone.

Select Another Cellular Phone

This feature allows you to select and start using another

phone paired with the UConnect威system.

•

Press the PHONE button to begin.

•

After the ⬙ Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say

⬙Setup Select Phone ⬙ and follow the prompts.

•

You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button

at any time while the list is being played, and then

choose the phone that you wish to select.

•

The selected phone will be used for the next phone

call. If the selected phone is not available, the

UConnect威 system will return to using the highest

priority phone present in or near (approximately

within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.

Delete UConnect威Paired Cellular Phones

•

Press the PHONE button to begin.

•

After the ⬙ Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say

⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙

•

At the next prompt, say ⬙ Delete⬙ and follow the

prompts.

•

You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button

at any time while the list is being played, and then

choose the phone you wish to delete.

98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Things You Should Know About Your UConnect姞

System

UConnect威Tutorial

To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the

PHONE button and say "UConnect威 Tutorial."

Voice Training

For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-

nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect威

system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this

training mode, follow one of the two following proce-

dures:

From outside the UConnect威mode (e.g., from radio

mode):

•

Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for

five seconds until the session begins, or,

•

Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the

⬙Setup, Voice Training⬙command.

Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the

UConnect威 system. For best results, the Voice Training

session should be completed when the vehicle is parked

with the engine running, all windows closed, and the

blower fan switched off.

This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The

system will adapt to the last trained voice only.

To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default

settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above

procedure and follow the prompts.

Voice Recognition (VR)

•

For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to

provide at least

⁄

in (1 cm) gap between the overhead

console (if equipped) and the mirror.

•

Always wait for the beep before speaking.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99

•

Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would

speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from

you.

•

Make sure that no one other than you is speaking

during a voice recognition period.

•

Performance is maximized under:

•

low-to-medium blower setting,

•

low-to-medium vehicle speed,

•

low road noise,

•

smooth road surface,

•

fully closed windows,

•

dry weather condition.

•

Even though the system is designed for users speaking

in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-

cents, the system may not always work for some.

•

When navigating through an automated system such

as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of

speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙ Send.⬙

•

Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is

not in motion is recommended.

•

It is not recommended to store similar sounding

names in the UConnect威phonebook.

•

Phonebook (Downloaded and UConnect威Local) name

recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not

similar.

•

You can say ⬙ O⬙ (letter ⬙ O⬙ ) for ⬙ 0⬙ (zero). ⬙ 800⬙ must be

spoken ⬙ eight-zero-zero.⬙

•

Even though international dialing for most number

combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing

number combinations may not be supported.

100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

•

In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be

compromised with the convertible top down.

Far End Audio Performance

•

Audio quality is maximized under:

•

low-to-medium blower setting,

•

low-to-medium vehicle speed,

•

low road noise,

•

smooth road surface,

•

fully closed windows,

•

dry weather conditions, and

•

operation from the driver's seat.

•

Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness

to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and

not the UConnect威system.

•

Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by

lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.

•

In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be

compromised with the convertible top down.

Bluetooth威 Communication Link

Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to

the UConnect威system. When this happens, the connec-

tion can generally be re-established by switching the

phone off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to

remain in Bluetooth威ON mode.

Power-Up

After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the

ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you

must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101

102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103

104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Voice Commands

Primary Alternate(s)

zero

one

two

three

four

five

six

seven

eight

nine

star (*)

plus (+)

pound (#)

add location

all

Voice Commands

Primary Alternate(s)

call

cancel

confirmation prompts

continue

delete

dial

download

edit

emergency

English

erase all

Espanol

Francais

help

home

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105

Voice Commands

Primary Alternate(s)

language

list names

list phones

mobile

mute

mute off

new entry

pager

pair a phone

phone pairing pairing

phonebook phone book

record again

redial

Voice Commands

Primary Alternate(s)

return to main menu return or main menu

select phone select

send

set up phone settings or phone

set up

towing assistance

transfer call

UConnect威Tutorial

try again

voice training

work

yes

106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and

RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

following conditions:

•

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by

the party responsible for compliance could void the

user's authority to operate the equipment.

•

This device may not cause harmful interference.

•

This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired

operation.

VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (VR) — IF

EQUIPPED

Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation

This Voice Recognition system allows you to

control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc

player, and a memo recorder.

NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface

System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of

the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-

mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a

raised voice level.

WARNING!

Any voice commanded system should be used only

in safe driving conditions and all attention should be

kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may

result in an accident causing serious injury or death.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107

When you press the VR hard-key, you will hear a beep.

The beep is your signal to give a command.

NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few

seconds, the system will present you with a list of

options.

If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists

options, press the VR hard-key, listen for the beep, and

say your command.

Pressing the VR hard-key while the system is speaking is

known as "barging in." The system will be interrupted

and after the beep you can add or change commands.

This will become helpful once you start to learn the

options.

NOTE: At any time, you can say the words "Cancel",

"Help", or "Main Menu".

These commands are universal and can be used from any

menu. All other commands can be used depending upon

the active application.

For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are

listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the

disc menu or from the FM radio menu.

When using this system, you should speak clearly and at

a normal speaking volume.

The system will best recognize your speech if the win-

dows are closed, and the heater/air-conditioning fan is

set to low.

At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your

commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.

To hear the first available Menu, press the VR hard-key

and say "Help" or "Main Menu".

108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Commands

The Voice Recognition system understands two types of

commands. Universal commands are available at all

times. Local commands are available if the supported

radio mode is active.

Changing the Volume

1. Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key.

2. Say a command (e.g., "Help").

3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the

volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni-

tion system is speaking. Please note the volume setting

for VR is different then the audio system.

Main Menu

Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key. You may

say "Main Menu" to switch to the main menu.

In this mode, you can say the following commands:

•

"Radio" (to switch to the radio mode)

•

"Disc" (to switch to the disc mode)

•

"Memo" (to switch to the memo recorder)

•

"System Setup" (to switch to system setup)

Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium

Wave — If Equipped)

To switch to the AM band say "AM" or "Radio AM". In

this mode, you may say the following commands:

•

"Frequency" (to change the frequency)

•

"Next Station" (to select the next station)

•

"Previous Station" (to select the previous station)

•

"Radio Menu" (to switch to the radio menu)

•

"Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109

Radio FM

To switch to the FM band say "FM" or "Radio FM". In

this mode, you may say the following commands:

•

"Frequency" (to change the frequency)

•

"Next Station" (to select the next station)

•

"Previous Station" (to select the previous station)

•

"Radio Menu" (to switch to the radio menu)

•

"Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)

Satellite Radio

To switch to satellite radio mode say "Sat" or "Satellite

Radio". In this mode, you may say the following com-

mands:

•

"Channel Number" (to change the channel by its

spoken number)

•

"Next Channel" (to select the next channel)

•

"Previous Channel" (to select the previous channel)

•

"List Channel" (to hear a list of available channels)

•

"Select Name" (to say the name of a channel)

•

"Radio Menu" (to switch to the radio menu)

•

"Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)

Disc

To switch to the disc mode say "Disc". In this mode, you

may say the following commands:

•

"Track" (#) (to change the track)

•

"Next Track" (to play the next track)

•

"Previous Track" (to play the previous track)

•

"Main Menu" (to switch to the main menu)

110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Memo

To switch to the voice recorder mode say "Memo". In this

mode, you may say the following commands:

•

"New Memo" (to record a new memo) — During the

recording you may press the VR hard-key to stop

recording. You proceed by saying one of the following

commands:

−

"Save" (to save the memo)

−

"Continue" (to continue recording)

−

"Delete" (to delete the recording)

•

"Play Memos" (to play previously recorded memos)

— During the playback you may press the VR hard-

key to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one

of the following commands:

−

"Repeat" (to repeat a memo)

−

"Next" (to play the next memo)

−

"Previous" (to play the previous memo)

−

"Delete" (to delete a memo)

•

"Delete All" (to delete all memos)

System Setup

To switch to system setup say "Setup". In this mode, you

may say the following commands:

•

"Language English"

•

"Language French"

•

"Language Spanish"

•

"Tutorial"

•

"Voice Training"

NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VR

hard-key first and wait for the beep before speaking the

"Barge In" commands.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111

Voice Training

For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-

nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect威

system Voice Training feature may be used.

1. Press the VR hard-key, say "System Setup" and once

you are in that menu then say "Voice Training." This will

train your own voice to the system and will improve

recognition.

2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the

UConnect威 System. For best results, the Voice Training

session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,

engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan

switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new

user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.

SEATS

Front Seat Adjustment

The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats, near the

floor. Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired

position.

Front Seat Adjustment

112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the

seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!

•

Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is

dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat

could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might

not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.

Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.

•

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your

chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat

belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use

the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.

Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped

The driver's seat height can be raised or lowered by using

the handle on the outboard side of the seat to adjust the

driving position.

Seat Height Adjustment

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113

Manual Lumbar — If Equipped

The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the outboard

side of the driver's seat. To increase or decrease support,

rotate the handle up or down.

Driver's Seatback Recline

To recline:

1. Lean forward before lifting the handle, then lean back

to the desired position and release the handle.

2. Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright

position.

Lumbar Adjustment

Reclining Seat

114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Adjustable Head Restraints

Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in

the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down

on the head restraints so that the upper edge is as high as

practical. To raise the head restraint, pull up on the head

restraint. To lower the head restraint, depress the button

and push down on the head restraint.

Head Restraint Adjustment

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115

Heated Seats — If Equipped

This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats.

The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion

and back. The controls for the front heated seats are

located on the center instrument panel area.

After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,

Low, or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each

switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights

will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none for Off.

Press the switch once to select High-level heat-

ing. Press the switch a second time to select

Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time

to shut Off the heating elements.

If High-level heating is selected, the system automatically

switches to Low-level heating and turns one indicator

light Off after 30 minutes of continuous operation. It will

turn the heater and the remaining indicator light off after

an additional 30 minutes of continuous operation. If

Low-level heating is selected, the system automatically

turns the heater and the indicator light Off after 30 min-

utes of continuous operation.

NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt

within two to five minutes.

WARNING!

•

Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,

spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-

haustion or other physical condition must exercise

care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns

even at low temperatures, especially if used for

long periods of time.

•

Do not place anything on the seat that insulates

against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This

may cause the seat heater to overheat.

116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat

To fold the front passenger seat, lift the recliner handle to

the full upward position and push the seatback forward

until it rests on the seat cushion.

Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat Handle

Front Passenger Seat Folded Flat

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117

Folding Rear Seat

To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can

be folded forward. Pull the strap forward to move the

seat forward and flat.

Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped

For additional comfort, pull the strap forward just

enough to release the seatback latch. Then push the

seatback to a reclined position, approximately 35 degrees

maximum, and release the strap.

Folding Rear Seat

Rear Seats Folded Flat

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

•

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed.

•

Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

•

Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat

and using a seat belt properly.

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

To open the hood, two latches must be released.

1. Pull the hood release lever located on the left kick

panel.

Hood Release

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119

2. Move the safety catch outside the vehicle under the

front edge of the hood, toward the center and raise the

hood.

Lift the hood prop rod, clipped to the right side (left side

facing hood) of the engine compartment to secure the

hood in the open position. Place the hood prop at the

location stamped into the inner hood surface.

CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to

close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-

mately 8 in (20 cm) and then drop it. This should

secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless

the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.

WARNING!

If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when

the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.

You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches

are fully latched before driving.

Safety Catch

120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

LIGHTS

Multifunction Lever

The multifunction lever controls the operation of the

headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight beam

selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights,

the passing lights, and the fog lights. The multifunction

lever is located on the left side of the steering column.

Headlights, Parking Lights and Instrument Panel

Lights

Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent

for parking light operation. Turn to the second detent for

headlight operation.

Headlight Control

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121

To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,

rotate the center portion of the multifunction lever up or

down.

Lights-On Reminder

If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the

ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the

driver when the driver's door is opened.

Fog Lights — If Equipped

The front fog light switch is on the multifunction

lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the

parking lights or the Low beam headlights and

pull out the end of the multifunction lever.

Dimmer Control

Front Fog Lights Control

122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the head-

lights on Low beam. Selecting High beam headlights will

turn off the fog lights.

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped

The High beam lights will come on as Daytime Running

Lights (DRL) at DRL intensity (lower), whenever the

ignition is ON, the engine is running, the headlight

switch is off, the parking brake is off, the turn signal is

off, and the shift lever is in any position except PARK.

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows

on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show

proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

You can signal a lane change by moving the lever

partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.

If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a

very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light

bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is

moved, it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is

defective.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch

Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch

the headlights to High beam. Pull the multifunction lever

toward you, to switch the headlights back to Low beam.

Flash-to-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by

lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This

will cause the headlights to turn on at High beam and

remain on until the lever is released.

NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to-

pass position for more than 30 seconds, the High beams

will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds for the next

flash-to-pass operation.

High Beam/Low Beam Control

124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Off-Road Lights — If Equipped

CAUTION!

The auxiliary lights mounted on the front bumper

should be illuminated during "Off-Road Use Only".

Having them illuminated on public streets, high-

ways, roads, etc. may be illegal in your state. Your

state may also require auxiliary lights to be covered

when operating your vehicle on public streets, high-

ways, roads, etc. Further illuminating these lights

with supplied covers installed could cause perma-

nent damage to the lights or covers. Before using

these auxiliary lights, contact your State Authorities

for proper operation and use of these lights.

The auxiliary Off-Road lights can be turned on when

off-road conditions require additional lighting. To turn

the auxiliary Off-Road light on, turn on the High beam

headlights and press the top of the switch. To turn off the

auxiliary Off-Road lights press the bottom of the switch.

NOTE: The High beam headlights must be on for the

auxiliary Off-Road lights to operate.

Off-Road Light Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125

Map/Reading Lights

These lights are mounted between the sun visors above

the rear view mirror. Each light is turned on by pressing

the button. Press the button a second time to turn the

light off. The lights also come on when a door is opened

or the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the

second detent.

NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is

pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned

off before leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off

automatically.

Map/Reading Lights

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The wipers and washers are operated by a switch

on the control lever. The lever is located on the

right side of the steering column.

Windshield Wiper Operation

Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper

speed.

Wiper Control

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

Intermittent Wiper System

Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions

make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-

tween cycles, desirable. Select the delay interval by

turning the end of the lever. Rotate the knob upward

(clockwise) to decrease the delay time and downward

(counterclockwise) to increase the delay time. The delay

can be regulated from a maximum of approximately

18 seconds between cycles, to a cycle every second.

Windshield Washers

To use the washer, pull the control lever toward you and

hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in

the delay range, the wiper will operate in low speed for

two wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then

resume the intermittent interval previously selected.

If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers

will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn off.

Washer Control

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Mist Feature

Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single

wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from

a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the

wipers will continue to operate.

CAUTION!

In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and

allow the wipers to return to the park position before

turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on

and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to

the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is

restarted.

Mist Control

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

TILT STEERING COLUMN

To tilt the steering column, push down on the lever below

the turn signal control lever. With one hand firmly on the

wheel, move the steering column up or down as desired.

Push the lever back up to lock the column firmly in place.

WARNING!

Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is

moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-

umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have

an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-

hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.

Tilting Steering Column Control

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over

accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph

(40 km/h). The Electronic Speed Control lever is located

on the right side of the steering wheel.

To Activate

Push the ON/OFF button. The CRUISE indicator in the

instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off,

push the ON/OFF button a second time. The CRUISE

indicator will turn off. The system should be turned off

when not in use.

WARNING!

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on

when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally

set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.

You could lose control and have an accident. Always

leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

To Set At A Desired Speed

When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press

down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator

and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

Electronic Speed Control Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady

speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the speed control

lever toward you "CANCEL", normal braking, or clutch

pressure while slowing the vehicle, will deactivate speed

control without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing

the ON/OFF button or turning off the ignition switch

erases the set speed memory.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RESUME

ACCEL lever up and release. Resume can be used at any

speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Vary The Speed Setting

When the Electronic Speed Control is on, speed can be

increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL.

Release the lever when the desired speed is reached, and

the new speed will be set.

Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result ina1mph

(1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,

speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will

increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.

To decrease speed while speed control is ON, push down

and hold SET DECEL. Release the lever when the desired

speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.

Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a

1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is

tapped, speed decreases.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system has been

designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch

functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure

proper operation. If this occurs, the system can be

reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control

switch ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle

set speed.

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Manual Transaxle

Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed

control. A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed

control disengages is normal.

Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to

be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed

loss.

WARNING!

Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the

system can't maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle

could go too fast for the conditions, and you could

lose control. An accident could be the result. Do not

use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on

roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or slip-

pery.

To Accelerate For Passing

Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the

pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains

speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on

moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so

it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed

Control.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (hand-

held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage

door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security

systems. The HomeLink威unit operates off your vehicle's

battery.

The HomeLink威buttons that are located in the headliner

or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink威

channels.

NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-

rity Alarm is active.

HomeLink威Buttons

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

•

Your motorized door or gate will open and close

while you are training the Universal Transceiver.

Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in

the path of the door or gate. Only use this trans-

ceiver with a garage door opener that has a "stop

and reverse" feature as required by Federal safety

standards. This includes most garage door opener

models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a

garage door opener without these safety features.

Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at

www.HomeLink.com for safety information or as-

sistance.

•

Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-

gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage

while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can

cause serious injury or death.

Programming HomeLink姞

Before You Begin

If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威buttons,

erase all channels before you begin training.

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for

20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.

It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the

hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed

to HomeLink威for more efficient training and accurate

transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage

when programming.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

2. Hold the battery side of the hand-held transmitter

away from the HomeLink威button you wish to program.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

Place the hand-held transmitter 1–3 in (3-8 cm) away

from the HomeLink威button you wish to program while

keeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen

HomeLink威 button and the hand-held transmitter button

until the HomeLink威indicator changes from a slow to a

rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威

and hand-held transmitter buttons.

Watch for the HomeLink威indicator to change flash rates.

When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to

30 seconds, or longer in rare cases. The garage door may

open and close while you train.

NOTE:

•

Some gate operators and garage door openers may

require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in

the "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" section.

•

After training a HomeLink威channel, if the garage

door does not operate with HomeLink威and the ga-

rage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the

garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,

proceed to the heading "Programming A Rolling Code

System."

4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威button

and observe the indicator light.

If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is

complete and the garage door (or device) should activate

when the HomeLink威button is pressed.

If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds, and

then turns to a constant light, continue with program-

ming for a Rolling Code.

5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM

At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate

the "Learn" or "Training" button.

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

This can usually be found where the hanging antenna

wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is

NOT the button normally used to open and close the

door).

6. Firmly press and release the "Learn" or "Training"

button. The name and color of the button may vary by

manufacturer.

NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next

step after the "Learn" button has been pressed.

7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed

HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two

seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and

activates, programming is complete.

If the device does not activate, press the button a third

time (for two seconds) to complete the training.

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please

call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at

www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

To program the remaining two HomeLink威buttons,

repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT

erase the channels.

1 — Garage Door Opener

2 — Training Button

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig-

nals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of

transmission – which may not be long enough for

HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.

Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are

designed to "time-out" in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling

process to prevent possible overheating of the garage

door or gate motor.

If you are having difficulties programming a garage door

opener or a gate operator, replace "Programming

HomeLink威 " Step 3 with the following:

3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威button

while you press and release - every two seconds

("cycle") your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink威

has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The

indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when

fully trained.

If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in

at this time.

Then proceed with Step 4 under "Programming

HomeLink威 " earlier in this section.

Using HomeLink姞

To operate, simply press and release the programmed

HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the

trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,

Security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,

etc. The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be

used at any time.

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞Button

To re-program a channel that has been previously

trained, follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威button until

the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not

release the button.

3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-

ming Homelink威Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

Security

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn

in your vehicle.

To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for

20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all

channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be

erased.

The HomeLink威Universal Transceiver is disabled when

the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

Troubleshooting Tips

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here

are some of the most common solutions:

•

Replace the battery in the original transmitter.

•

Press the "Learn" button on the Garage Door Opener

to complete the training for a Rolling Code.

•

Did you unplug the device for training, and remember

to plug it back in?

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please

call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at

www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

General Information

This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry

Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference

2. This device must accept any interference that may be

received including interference that may cause undesired

operation

NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies

with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user's authority to operate the

device.

The term IC before the certification/registration number

only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica-

tions were met.

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The power sunroof switch is located in the reading light.

Power Sunroof Switch

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

•

Never leave children in a vehicle, with the key in

the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-

tended children, can become entrapped by the

power sunroof while operating the power sunroof

switch. Such entrapment may result in serious

injury or death.

•

In an accident, there is a greater risk of being

thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You

could also be seriously injured or killed. Always

fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all

passengers are properly secured too.

•

Do not allow small children to operate the sun-

roof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or

any object to project through the sunroof opening.

Injury may result.

Opening the Sunroof

Manual Mode

To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward

to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the

movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open

condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward

again.

Express Mode

Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof

will open automatically from any position. The sunroof

will open fully, and stop automatically, this is called

"express open". During express open operation any

movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

Closing the Sunroof

Manual Mode

To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the

forward position. Again, any release of the switch will

stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a

partial close condition until the switch is pushed and

held forward again. To ensure sunroof is fully closed,

press and hold switch until sunroof has completely

stopped moving.

Express Mode

Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof

will close automatically from any position. The sunroof

will close fully, and stop automatically, this is called

"express close". During express close operation, any

movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.

Pinch Protect Feature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of

the sunroof during express close operation. If an obstruc-

tion in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof

will automatically retract. Remove obstruction and press

the switch forward and release to express close.

Pinch Protect Override

If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,

press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after

the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move

towards the close position.

NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is

pressed.

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Venting Sunroof — Express

Press and hold the "V" button, and the sunroof will open

to the vent position. This is called "express vent", and

will occur regardless of the sunroof position. During

express vent operation, any movement of the switch will

stop the sunroof.

Sunshade Operation

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the

sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is

open.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of

pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the

ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain

open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-

rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with

the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows

together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs

with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to

minimize the buffeting or open any window.

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean

the glass panel.

Ignition Off Operation

The sunroof will also operate up to 45 seconds after the

ignition has been turned OFF. The sunroof operation will

be canceled if either of the front doors are opened during

the 45 second time period.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

There is a standard 12-Volt power outlet located in the

instrument panel for added convenience. This outlet can

power cell phones, electronics and other low power

devices.

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

•

Do not use a three-prong adapter.

•

Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.

•

Do not touch with wet hands.

•

Close the lid when not in use and while driving

the vehicle.

•

If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an

electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!

•

Many accessories that can be plugged in draw

power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in

use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if

plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will

discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life

and/or prevent engine starting.

(Continued)

Power Outlet 12-Volts

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)

•

Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,

vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the

battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-

mittently and with great caution.

•

After the use of high power draw accessories, or

long periods of the vehicle not being started (with

accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be

driven a sufficient length of time to allow the

generator to recharge the vehicle's battery.

POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED

A 115-Volt (150-Watt) AC power inverter is located on the

rear of the center console for added convenience. The

power inverter can be used to power cell phones, elec-

tronics and other low power devices.

NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power

outlet will shut down if the 115-Volt AC (150-Watt

maximum) power rating is exceeded.

115-Volt Power Outlet

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

•

Do not use a three-prong adaptor.

•

Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.

•

Do not touch with wet hands.

•

Close the lid when not in use.

•

If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an

electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!

•

Many accessories that can be plugged in draw

power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in

use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if

plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will

discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life

and/or prevent engine starting.

•

Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,

vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the

battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-

mittently and with great caution.

•

After the use of high power draw accessories, or

long periods of the vehicle not being started (with

accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be

driven a sufficient length of time to allow the

generator to recharge the vehicle's battery.

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

STORAGE

Glove Compartment And Storage Bin

Located on the passenger side of the instrument panel are

an upper storage bin and a lower glove compartment.

To open the lower glove compartment, pull outward on

the release handle.

1 — Upper Storage Bin

2 — Lower Glove Compartment

Glove Compartment

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147

Door Storage — If Equipped

The interior door panels are equipped with upper and

lower storage areas.

Front Door Storage

Rear Door Storage

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CUPHOLDERS

Your vehicle is equipped with four cupholders. There are

two cupholders located in the front.

There are also two cupholders located in the back for the

rear passengers.

Front Cupholders

Rear Cupholders

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

CONSOLE FEATURES

The floor console contains both an upper and lower

storage compartment.

To open the upper storage compartment, push inward on

the upper handle to unlatch the upper lid and lift the

upper lid.

To open the lower storage compartment, lift upward on

the lower handle to unlatch the lower storage compart-

ment and lift the lid open.

Upper Storage Compartment

Lower Storage Compartment

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-

ment lid in the open position. Cell phones, music

players, and other handheld electronic devices

should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices

while driving can cause an accident due to distrac-

tion, resulting in death or injury.

CARGO AREA FEATURES

Cargo Light/Removable Self-Recharging

Flashlight — If Equipped

The dual-function light is mounted in the headliner

above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area, and

part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight

when needed. The flashlight features two bright LED

light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium

batteries that recharge when snapped back into place for

convenience.

Press in on the flashlight to release it.

Press And Release

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151

To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,

twice for low, and a third time to return to off.

Cargo Cover — If Equipped

The cargo area trim panels include two notches for

mounting the available tonneau cover that accommo-

dates the reclining rear seat.

WARNING!

In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could

cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and

strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo

cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compart-

ment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken

from its mounting. Do not store in the vehicle.

Three-Press Switch

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Removable Load Floor

The cargo area load floor is removable and can be

washed with mild soap and water.

Cargo Tie-Down Loops

There are four D-rings installed in the cargo area for

securing cargo.

WARNING!

•

Cargo tie-down loops are not safe anchors for a

child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision

a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to

come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use

only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.

•

The weight and position of cargo and passengers

can change the vehicle center of gravity and ve-

hicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting

in personal injury, follow these guidelines for

loading your vehicle:

•

Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put

heavier objects as low and as far forward as

possible.

(Continued)

Cargo Load Floor

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear

axle. Too much weight or improperly placed

weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the

rear of the vehicle to sway.

•

Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of

the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-

come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or

collision.

•

To help protect against personal injury, passengers

should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The

rear cargo space is intended for load carrying

purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit

in seats and use seat belts.

Fold Down Speakers — If Equipped

When the liftgate is open, the speakers can swing down

off the trim panel to face rearward, for tailgating and

other activities.

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

A switch on the right side of the steering column controls

operation of the rear wiper/washer function. Rotating

the center of the switch forward to the on position will

Fold-Down Speakers

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

activate the wiper. The rear wiper operates in an inter-

mittent mode only. Rotating the center of the switch all

the way forward will turn on the wash function. The

wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button

is pressed. Upon release, the wipers will cycle two times

before returning to the set position.

If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned

OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the "Park"

position if power accessory delay is active. Power acces-

sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door, if this

happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position

and will not go to "Park".

Rear Window Defroster

The pushbutton is located on

the bottom right side of the

blower control knob. Press

this button to turn on the rear

window defroster. An amber

light shows that the defroster

is on.

Rear Wiper/Washer Control

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

The defroster will automatically turn off after approxi-

mately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of

operation, press the button a second time. To prevent

excessive battery drain, use the defroster only when the

engine is operating.

CAUTION!

Use care when washing the inside of the rear window

to prevent damage to heating elements. Use a soft

cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to

the heating elements. Also, keep all objects a safe

distance from the window to prevent damaging the

heating elements.

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

䡵Instrument Panel Features ................ 161

䡵Instrument Cluster — Premium ............ 162

䡵Instrument Cluster Descriptions ............ 163

䡵Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —

If Equipped ........................... 175

▫Engine Oil Change Indicator System ....... 176

▫EVIC Functions ...................... 177

▫Compass/Temperature/Audio ........... 178

▫Average Fuel Economy ................ 178

▫Distance To Empty (DTE) ............... 179

▫Elapsed Time ....................... 179

▫Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) ............. 179

▫Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable

Features) ........................... 179

䡵Electronic Digital Clock ................. 185

▫Clock Setting Procedure ................ 185

䡵Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio And

6–Disc CD/DVD Changer (MP3/WMA AUX

Jack) ................................ 186

▫Operating Instructions - Radio Mode ....... 186

▫Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD

And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 194

▫Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files ........ 196

▫List Button

(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) ......... 199

▫Info Button

(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) ......... 199

䡵AM/FM/CD/DVD Multimedia System Radio

(RER/REN) – If Equipped ................ 201

▫Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition

System (VR) — If Equipped ............. 201

▫Operating Instructions — Hands-Free

Communication (UConnect威 )—

If Equipped ......................... 202

▫Clock Setting Procedure ................ 202

䡵Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With

CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) ................ 204

▫Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ...... 204

▫Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD

And MP3 Audio Play .................. 207

▫Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............. 209

▫Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .... 212

䡵Sales Code RES/RSC — AM/FM Stereo Radio

With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius

Radio ............................... 212

▫Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ...... 213

158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

▫Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD

And MP3 Audio Play .................. 218

▫Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............. 220

▫List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 223

▫Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 223

䡵Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) —

If Equipped ........................... 224

▫Connecting The iPod 威................. 225

▫Using This Feature ................... 225

▫Controlling The iPod 威Using Radio Buttons . . 226

▫Play Mode ......................... 226

▫List Or Browse Mode .................. 227

䡵Satellite Radio — If Equipped

(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU Radios Only) ..... 229

▫System Activation .................... 230

▫Electronic Serial Number/Sirius

Identification Number (ESN/SID) ......... 230

▫Selecting Satellite Mode ................ 231

▫Satellite Antenna ..................... 231

▫Reception Quality .................... 231

▫Operating Instructions — Satellite Mode .... 231

▫Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone

(If Equipped) ........................ 234

▫Operating Instructions — Video

Entertainment System (VES)™

(If Equipped) ........................ 234

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159

䡵Remote Sound System Controls —

If Equipped ........................... 235

▫Radio Operation ..................... 235

▫CD Player .......................... 236

䡵CD/DVD Maintenance .................. 236

䡵Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ....... 237

䡵Climate Controls ...................... 237

▫Manual Heating, Ventilation And Air

Conditioning (HVAC) System ............ 237

▫Air Conditioning (A/C) ................ 241

▫Air Filtration System — If Equipped ....... 242

▫Operating Tips ...................... 243

160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 - Air Outlet 5 - Storage Bin 9 - Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped

2 - Demisters 6 - Glove Compartment 10 - Hazard Warning Flasher

3 - Instrument Cluster 7 - Climate Controls 11 - ESP OFF Switch – If Equipped

4 - Radio 8 - Power Outlet 12 - Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM

162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS

1. Fuel Gauge / Fuel Door Reminder

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

the pointer will show the level of fuel remain-

ing in the fuel tank. The fuel pump symbol

points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel

door is located.

2. Charging System Light

This light shows the status of the electrical charg-

ing system. The light should come on when the

ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly

as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while

driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential

electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If

the charging system light remains on, it means that the

vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging

system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-

rized dealer.

3. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light

This light informs you of a problem with the

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a

problem is detected, the light will come on

while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition

key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the

shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light

should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine

running your vehicle will usually be drivable, however,

see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If

the light is flashing when the engine is running, imme-

diate service is required and you may experience reduced

performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and

your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on

when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on

briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on

during starting, have the system checked by an autho-

rized dealer.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163

4. Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The

light should turn on momentarily when the engine

is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the

vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A

chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns

on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.

This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.

The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

5. Low Fuel Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal

(7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until

fuel is added.

6. Speedometer

The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per

hour and/or kilometers per hour (mph/kph).

7. Airbag Warning Light

This light turns on and remains on for seven

seconds as a bulb check, when the ignition

switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on

during starting, stays on, or turns on while

driving, have the system inspected by an authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

8. Turn Signal Indicators

The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal

when the turn signal lever is operated.

If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has

traveled about one mile with the turn signals on, a

continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the

signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check

for a defective outside light bulb.

164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

9. High Beam Indicator

This indicator shows that the headlights are on

high beam. Push the multifunction lever forward

to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward

yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.

10. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition

switch is turned to the ON position and may

stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it

indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system

is not functioning and that service is required. However,

the conventional brake system will continue to operate

normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced

as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock

brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the

ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the

light inspected by an authorized dealer.

11. Seat Belt Reminder Light

When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this

light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb

check. During the bulb check, if the driver's seat

belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb

check or when driving, if the driver's seat belt remains

unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate

and the chime will sound. Refer to "Occupant Restraints"

in Section 2 for more information.

12. Tachometer

The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine

revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range.

Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to

prevent engine damage.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165

13. Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condi-

tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-

proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a

single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.

Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to

pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a

continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed

to cool.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and

stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,

shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-

hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to

normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for

service. Refer to "If Your Engine Overheats" in Section 6

for more information.

14. Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions, in-

cluding brake fluid level and parking brake appli-

cation. If the brake light turns on, it may indicate that the

parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low,

or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system

reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been

disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the

master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake

hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the

Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sys-

tem. In this case, the light will remain on until the

condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to

the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying

the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during

each stop.

166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-

ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic

system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is

indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on

when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has

dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp

cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-

tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and

the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-

sary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is

dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.

It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have

an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the

Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS

Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by

turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the

ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-

mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless

the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.

If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected

by an authorized dealer.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is

applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is

applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

15. Transmission Temperature Indicator

During sustained high speed driving on hot

days, the automatic transmission oil may be-

come too hot. If this happens, the transmission

overheat indicator light will come on and the

vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic transmis-

sion cools down enough to allow a return to the re-

quested speed. If the high speed is maintained, the

overheating will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion.

16. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped

This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-

mately 16 seconds, when the vehicle security

alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly

until the vehicle is disarmed.

17. Temperature Gauge

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-

ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that

the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-

ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,

or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to

exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could

damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads "H"

pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with

the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops

back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on

the "H" and you hear continuous chimes, turn the

engine off immediately, and call an authorized deal-

ership for service.

168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or

others could be badly burned by steam or boiling

coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-

ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If you

decide to look under the hood yourself, see Section 7

of this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cool-

ing System Pressure Cap paragraph.

18. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped

This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed

Control System is ON.

19. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped

This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed Control

System is SET to the desired speed.

20. Shift Lever Indicator

This display indicator shows the automatic transmission

shift lever selection.

NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from

PARK.

21. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Button

Press this button to change the display from odometer to

either of the two trip odometer settings. Trip A or Trip B

will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and

hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer

to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be in Trip

mode to reset.

22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If

Equipped

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly, when cold and in-

flated to the inflation pressure recommended by

the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or

tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a

different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169

or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when

one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-

nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving

on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect

the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper

tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has

not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS

low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS

malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not

operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is

combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the

system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-

quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-

tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure

as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installation of replacement or

alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the

TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS

to continue to function properly.

170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and

warning have been established for the tire size

equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-

tion or sensor damage may result when using re-

placement equipment that is not of the same size,

type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause

sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or

balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a

TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.

23. 4WD Indicator — If Equipped

This light indicates the vehicle is in 4WD.

24. Odometer/Trip Odometer

This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has

been driven. Also, the cluster will display, replacing the

odometer/trip odometer, vehicle warning messages such

as: "door/gate ajar", "gASCAP" (loose gas cap), "Lo

tIrE" (display toggles between Lo and tIrE when tire

pressure is low), and "Change Oil" message. Loose gas

cap (gASCAP) will be displayed from the Odometer/Trip

Odometer on all models.

NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the optional

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the in-

strument cluster, all warnings including "door", and

"gATE" will only be displayed in the EVIC display. For

additional information, refer to "Electronic Vehicle Infor-

mation Center — If Equipped" in Section 3.

United States federal regulations require that upon trans-

fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur-

chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171

driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed

during repair or replacement, be sure to keep a record of

the reading before and after the service so that the correct

mileage can be determined.

CHAngE OIL Message

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change

indicator system. The "CHAngE OIL" message will flash

in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately

12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate

the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil

change indicator system is duty-cycle based, which

means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate

dependent upon your personal driving style. Unless

reset, this message will continue to display each time you

turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn

off the message temporarily, press and release the Trip

Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset the

oil change indicator system (after performing the sched-

uled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not

start the engine).

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three

times within 10 seconds.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you

start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not

reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.

25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of

an Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II that

monitors emissions, engine, and automatic trans-

mission control systems. The light will illuminate when

the key is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If

the bulb does not come on when turning the key from

OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,

poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after

engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light

stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In

most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will

not require towing.

If the MIL flashes when the engine is running, serious

conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of

power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle

should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.

NOTE: If this indicator comes on, it will brighten to

FULL DAYTIME INTENSITY and will not be dimmable.

26. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped

This light shows when the front fog lights are ON.

27.

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light /

Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light — If

Equipped

If this indicator light flashes during accelera-

tion, apply as little throttle as possible. While

driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your

speed and driving to the prevailing road con-

ditions, and do not switch off the Electronic Stability

Program (ESP), or Traction Control System (TCS).

28. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light

The malfunction lamp for the Electronic Stabil-

ity Program (ESP) is combined with Brake

Assist System (BAS). The yellow "ESP/BAS

Warning Lamp" comes on when the ignition

switch is turned to the "ON" position. They should go

out with the engine running. If the "ESP/BAS Warning

Lamp" comes on continuously with the engine running,

a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the

BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173

cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles at

speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized

dealer as soon as possible.

29. 4WD! Warning Light — If Equipped

This light monitors the 4-Wheel Drive (4WD)

system. The light will come on, for a bulb

check, when the ignition key is turned to the

ON position and may stay on for as long as

three seconds.

When lit solid: There is an 4WD system fault. 4WD

performance will be at a reduced level. Service the 4WD

system soon.

When blinking: The 4WD system is temporarily dis-

abled due to overload condition.

30. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Display — If Equipped

When the appropriate conditions exist, this display

shows the EVIC messages.

For more information refer to "Electronic Vehicle Infor-

mation Center (EVIC)" in this section of the manual.

31. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Button — If Equipped

Pushing this button, will change the display to the

choices available for EVIC.

For more information refer to "Electronic Vehicle Infor-

mation Center (EVIC)" in this section of the manual.

174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER

(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-

tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the

instrument cluster.

The EVIC consists of the following:

•

System status

•

Vehicle information warning message displays

•

Personal settings (customer-programmable features)

•

Compass heading

•

Outside temperature display

•

Trip computer functions

•

UConnect威 hands-free communication system dis-

plays (if equipped)

•

Audio mode display

•

Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175

When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays

the following messages:

•

Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime

after one mile traveled)

•

Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)

•

Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)

•

Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)

•

Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)

•

RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)

•

Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle not in PARK

(automatic transmissions) or vehicle is in motion

(manual transmissions).

•

Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single

chime if speed is above 1 mph (1 km/h)

•

Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single

chime if speed is above 1 mph (1 km/h)

•

Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in

motion)

•

Gate Ajar (with a single chime)

•

Headlights On

•

Key In Ignition

•

Check TPM System

Engine Oil Change Indicator System

Oil Change Required

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change

indicator system. The "Oil Change Required" message

will flash in the EVIC display for approximately five

seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the

next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change

indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the

engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon

your personal driving style.

176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each

time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN

position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and

release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument

cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after

performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the fol-

lowing procedure.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Do not

start the engine.

2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times

within 10 seconds.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you

start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not

reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.

EVIC Functions

Press the EVIC button until one of the following func-

tions is displayed on the EVIC:

•

Compass/Temperature/Audio

•

Average Fuel Economy

EVIC Button

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177

•

Distance To Empty (DTE)

•

Elapsed Time

•

Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)

•

Personal Settings

To Reset The Display

Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the

function currently being displayed. Reset will only occur

if a resettable function is currently being displayed. To

reset all resettable functions, press and release the EVIC

button a second time within three seconds of resetting the

currently displayed function. Reset ALL will be dis-

played during this three second window.

Compass/Temperature/Audio

Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight

compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is

facing, the outside temperature and the current radio

station.

For additional information regarding the compass, refer

to Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)

in this Section.

Average Fuel Economy

Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.

When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read

"RESET" or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the

history information will be erased, and the averaging will

continue from the last fuel reading before the reset.

178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Distance To Empty (DTE)

Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with

the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is

determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous

and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel

tank level. This is not resettable.

NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle

loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of

the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.

When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48.3 km)

estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change

to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL⬙. This display will

continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a

significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the

⬙LOW FUEL ⬙ text and a new DTE value will be dis-

played, based on the current values in the DTE calcula-

tion and the current fuel tank level.

Elapsed Time

Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset

when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed

time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON

or START position.

Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)

Refer to Section 5, "Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)" for system operation.

Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable

Features)

This allows the driver to set and recall features when the

transmission is in PARK (automatic transmission) or the

vehicle is stopped (manual transmissions).

Press and release the EVIC button until "Personal Set-

tings" is displayed in the EVIC.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179

Use the EVIC button to display one of the following

choices:

Language

When in this display you may select different languages

for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.

Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects

English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais depend-

ing on availability. As you continue, the displayed infor-

mation will be shown in the selected language.

NOTE: UConnect威 language will not change using the

EVIC. Please refer to "Language Selection" in the Hands–

Free Communication (UConnect威) — If Equipped section

of this manual for details.

Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)

When ON is selected, all doors lock automatically when

the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Press

and hold the EVIC button when in this display until

"ON" or "OFF" appears to make your selection.

Auto Unlock On Exit

When ON is selected, all the vehicle's doors will unlock

when the driver's door is opened, if the vehicle is

stopped (manual transmissions) or the vehicle is stopped

and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL

position (automatic transmissions). Press and hold the

EVIC button when in this display until "ON" or "OFF"

appears to make your selection.

Remote Unlock Driver's Door 1st

When DRIVER'S DOOR 1ST is selected only the driv-

er's door will unlock on the first press of the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button and

requires a second press to unlock the remaining locked

doors. When REMOTE UNLOCK ALL DOORS is se-

lected all of the doors will unlock at the first press of the

RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. Press and hold the

EVIC button when in this display until "DRIVER'S

DOOR 1ST" or "ALL DOORS" appears to make your

selection.

180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock

When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when

the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature

may be selected with or without the flash lights on

lock/unlock feature. Press and hold the EVIC button

when in this display until "ON" or "OFF" appears to

make your selection.

Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock

When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will

flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the

RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or

without the sound horn on lock feature selected. Press

and hold the EVIC button when in this display until

"ON" or "OFF" appears to make your selection.

Delay Turning Headlights Off

When this feature is selected the driver can choose to

have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds

when exiting the vehicle. Press and hold the EVIC button

when in this display until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears to make

your selection.

Headlights On With Wipers (Available with Auto

Headlights Only)

When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the

AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-

mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The

headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned

off, if they were turned on by this feature. Press and hold

the EVIC button when in this display until "ON" or

"OFF" appears to make your selection.

NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime

causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the

brightness, refer to "Lights" in section 3.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181

Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit

When this feature is selected the power window

switches, radio, hands–free system, power sunroof, and

power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes

after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Opening a

vehicle door will cancel this feature. Press and hold the

EVIC button when in this display until "OFF", "45 sec.",

"5 min.", or "10 min." appears to make your selection.

Illuminated Approach

When this feature is selected the headlights will activate

and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are

unlocked using the RKE transmitter. Press and hold the

EVIC button when in this display until "OFF", "30 sec.",

"60 sec.", or "90 sec." appears to make your selection.

Confirmation of Voice Commands — If Equipped

When ON is selected, all voice commands from the

UConnect威 system are confirmed. Press and hold the

EVIC button when in this display until "ON" or "OFF"

appears to make your selection.

Display English or Metric

The EVIC, odometer and navigation system units can be

changed between English and Metric.

Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until

"US" or "METRIC" appears to make your selection.

Compass Variance

Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic

North and Geographic North. To ensure compass accu-

racy, the compass variance should be properly set accord-

ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle

will be driven. When properly set, the compass will

automatically account for this difference.

182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as

cell phones, iPod's, radar detectors, PDA's and laptops)

should be kept away from the top of the instrument

panel. This is where the compass module is located and

such devices may interfere and cause false compass

readings.

To Set the Variance With the ignition in the ON position,

quickly (less than one second) press and release the EVIC

button several times until you have displayed the Per-

sonal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) menu.

Once in the Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable

Features) menu, press and release (less than one second)

the EVIC button several times until "Compass Variance"

is highlighted. The "Compass Variance" message and the

current variance zone number will be displayed. To

change the zone, press and hold (longer than two sec-

onds) the EVIC button to increment the variance one

step. Repeat as necessary, with individual long (for at

least 1 second) EVIC button presses for each increment,

until the desired variance is achieved. To exit the Vari-

ance Programming, press the EVIC button with a short

(less than one second) button press.

NOTE: The factory default is Zone 8. During program-

ming, the zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to

Zone 1.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183

Compass Calibration

If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the

variance has been properly set, you may wish to manu-

ally recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the

compass:

1. Start the engine and leave the transmission in the

PARK position.

2. Press and release the EVIC button (less than one

second) several times until the EVIC displays the "Per-

sonal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)"

menu.

3. Once in the "Personal Settings (Customer-

Programmable Features)" menu, press and release the

EVIC button (less than one second) several times until

"Calibrate Compass (Yes)" is displayed.

4. Press the EVIC button (more than one second), this

will place the Compass in calibration mode. The CAL

indicator will come on continuously in the EVIC display

to indicate that the compass is now in the calibration

mode, and that the vehicle can now be driven to calibrate.

5. Press the EVIC button (less than one second) from the

⬙Calibrate Compass (Yes)⬙screen will exit the EVIC

Customer-Programmable Features, and return it to its

normal operating mode.

6. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle

in one or more complete 360–degree circle under 5 mph

(8 km/h) in an area free from power lines and large

metallic objects, until the "CAL" indicator turns off. The

compass will now function normally.

184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK

The clock and radio each use the display panel built into

the radio. A digital readout shows the frequency and/or

time in hours and minutes (depending on your radio

model), whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or

ACC position.

When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, or when

the radio frequency is being displayed, timekeeping is

accurately maintained.

On the AM/FM/CD (6-disc) radio, the time button

alternates the location of the time and frequency on the

display. On the AM/FM/CD (single-disc) radio, only one

of the two, time or frequency, is displayed.

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

2. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/AUDIO con-

trol knob.

3. After the hours are adjusted, push the TUNE/AUDIO

control knob to set the minutes.

4. Adjust the minutes by turning the TUNE/AUDIO

control knob.

5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait approximately

five seconds.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185

SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO

AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX

JACK)

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right

side of the radio faceplate.

Operating Instructions - Radio Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

position to operate the radio.

Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the

radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second

time to turn off the radio.

Electronic Volume Control

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360

degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the

ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the

volume and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be

set at the same volume level as last played.

REQ Radio

186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SEEK Buttons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next

listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio

will remain tuned to the new station until you make

another selection. Holding either button will bypass

stations without stopping until you release it.

SCAN Button

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for

the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if

equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each

listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop

the search, press the SCAN button a second time.

Voice Recognition Button (UConnect威Hands-Free

Phone) — If Equipped

Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone

(UConnect威 ) feature (if equipped). Refer to "Hands-Free

Communication (UConnect威)" in Section 3.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not

available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With

UConnect" message will display on the radio screen.

Phone Button (UConnect威Hands-Free Phone) — If

Equipped

Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone

(UConnect威 ) feature (if equipped). Refer to "Hands-Free

Communication (UConnect威)" in Section 3.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not

available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With

UConnect" message will display on the radio screen.

TIME Button

Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time

and frequency display.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob.

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes

will begin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control

knob to save the time change.

5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.

The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button

and selecting the "SET HOME CLOCK" entry. Once in

this display follow the above procedure, starting at

step 2.

INFO Button

Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call

letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text

message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons

causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the

direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM

or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.

TUNE Control

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise

to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS

will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to

the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second

time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL

control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the

mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third

time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL

control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the

treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth

time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/

SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the

sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time

and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control

knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between

the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to

exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

MUSIC TYPE Button

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type

mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button

or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five

seconds will allow the program format type to be se-

lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast

Music Type information.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following

format types:

Program Type 16-Digit Character

Display

No program type or un-

defined None

Adult Hits Adlt Hit

Classical Classicl

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189

Program Type 16-Digit Character

Display

Classic Rock Cls Rock

College College

Country Country

Foreign Language Language

Information Inform

Jazz Jazz

News News

Nostalgia Nostalga

Oldies Oldies

Personality Persnlty

Public Public

Rhythm and Blues R & B

Religious Music Rel Musc

Religious Talk Rel Talk

Rock Rock

Program Type 16-Digit Character

Display

Soft Soft

Soft Rock Soft Rck

Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R & B

Sports Sports

Talk Talk

Top 40 Top 40

Weather Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is

displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency

station with the same selected Music Type name. The

Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type

(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be

exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SETUP Button

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between

the following items:

NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll

through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to

select an entry and make changes.

•

DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,

selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current

highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll

up and down the menu (if equipped).

•

DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between

playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by

pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).

•

DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options

will display the following:

•

Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch

subtitles to different subtitle languages that are

available on the disc (if equipped).

•

Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will

switch to different audio languages (if supported on

the disc) (if equipped).

•

Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change

the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if

equipped).

NOTE:

•

The available selections for each of the above entries

varies depending upon the disc.

•

These selections can only be made while playing a

DVD.

•

VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and

OFF (if equipped).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191

•

VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if

equipped).

•

VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the

mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by

pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).

•

Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows

you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control

knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the

TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.

Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save

changes.

•

Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the

user to scroll through the following items and set

defaults according to customer preference.

Menu Language — If Equipped

Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the

default startup DVD menu language (effective only if

language supported by disc). If you want to select a

language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙ other.⬙

Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/

SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the

number and then push to select.

Audio Language — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio

language (effective only if the language is supported by

the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling

down and selecting ⬙ other.⬙ Enter the country code using

the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down

to select the number and then push to select.

Subtitle Language — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle

language (effective only if the language is supported by

the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling

down and selecting ⬙ other.⬙ Enter the country code using

192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down

to select the number and then push to select.

Subtitles — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle

Off or On.

Audio DRC — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio

dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙ High,⬙ and under

this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the

setting is ⬙ Normal.⬙

Aspect Ratio — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide

screen, pan scan, and letter box.

AutoPlay — If Equipped

When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will

bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the

movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not

auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU

button on the remote control to select desired title to play.

NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before

loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after

a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the

defaults are effective only if the disc supports the

customer-preferred settings.

AM and FM Buttons

Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.

SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to

commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.

The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.

Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station

and press and release that button. If a button is not

selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-

ton, the station will continue to play but will not be

stored into pushbutton memory.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by

repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press

the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display

window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in

both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,

and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into

pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2

memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton

twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding

button number will display.

Buttons1-6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you

commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12

Satellite (if equipped) stations}.

DISC Button

Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from

AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and

MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)

The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by

geographic region. These region codes must match in

order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD

disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD

player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their

vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code

of the player a maximum of five times.

CAUTION!

The radio may shut down during extremely hot

conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate

"Disc Hot" and shut off until a safe temperature is

reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the

optics of the DVD player and other radio internal

components.

194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

position to operate the radio.

LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)

Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the

corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being

loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and

prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays

⬙INSERT DISC,⬙insert the CD into the player.

Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙when the disc

is loading and "READING DISC" when the radio is

reading the disc.

CAUTION!

This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.

The use of other sized discs may damage the CD

player mechanism.

Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)

Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton

with the corresponding number (1-6) where the

CD was loaded and the disc will unload and

move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio

display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙when the disc is

being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.

Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all

CDs will be ejected from the radio.

The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

SEEK Button (CD MODE)

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the

CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning

of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the

previous selection if the CD is within the first second of

the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK

button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in

CD and MP3/MWA modes.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195

SCAN Button (CD MODE)

Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the

CD currently playing.

TIME Button (CD MODE)

Press this button to change the display from a large CD

playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF (CD MODE)

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will

begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or

another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button

works in a similar manner.

AM or FM Button (CD MODE)

Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.

Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files

The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable

MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.

When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the

following restrictions.

Supported Media (Disc Types)

The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the

radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,

DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660

Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.

When reading discs recorded using formats other than

ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read

files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-

mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

•

Maximum number of directory levels: 8

•

Maximum number of files: 255

•

Maximum number of folders: 100

•

Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

•

Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙ .⬙ and a three-

character extension)

•

Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙ .⬙ and a three-

character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.

Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal

CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/

WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep

disc open after writing⬙are most likely multisession

discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/

WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.

If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and

MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/

WMA tracks on that disc.

Supported MP3/WMA File Formats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA

extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files

named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play-

back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file

as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.

When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio

data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling

frequencies in the following table are supported. In

addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The

majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate

and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197

MPEG

Specification Sampling

Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)

MPEG-1 Audio

Layer 3 48, 44.1, 32

320, 256, 224,

192, 160, 128,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48

MPEG-2 Audio

Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48

WMA

Specification Sampling

Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)

WMA 44.1 and 48 48, 64, 96, 128,

160, 192 VBR

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title

are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not

supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not

supported.

Playback of MP3/WMA Files

When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,

the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium

contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more

time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.

Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be

affected by the following:

•

Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than

CD-R media

•

Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer

to load than non-multisession discs

•

Number of files and folders - Loading times will

increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended

to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a

single-session disc, enable the "Disc at Once" option

before writing to the disc.

198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)

Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders

on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by

turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a

folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will

begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the

next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain

playable files).

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)

Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through

the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File

Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed

time⬙ priority mode.

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or

more and radio will display song titles for each file.

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds

to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which

allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an

MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and

utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source

and play through the vehicle speakers.

Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-

iary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the

device's volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio

is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the

AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume

down.

SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199

SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)

Press the TIME button to change the display from

elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will

display for five seconds.

RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)

No function.

Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition

System (VR) (If Equipped)

For the radio, refer to "Voice Recognition System (VR)" in

Section 3.

For UConnect威"Voice Recognition System (VR)," refer to

"Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)" in Section 3.

Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone

(UConnect威 ) (If Equipped)

Refer to "Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)" in

Section 3.

Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If

Equipped)

Refer to "Satellite Radio" in this section.

Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment

System (VES)™ (If Equipped)

Refer to separate "Video Entertainment System (VES)™

Guide."

200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Dolby威

Manufactured under license from Dolby威Laboratories.

⬙Dolby 威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of

Dolby威Laboratories.

Macrovision

This product incorporates copyright protection technol-

ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-

tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection

technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is

intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,

unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse

engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

DTS™

⬙DTS™ ⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0 ⬙ are trademarks of Digital The-

ater Systems, Inc.

AM/FM/CD/DVD MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM RADIO

(RER/REN) – IF EQUIPPED

NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side

of the unit's faceplate.

The REN and RER Multimedia systems contain a radio,

CD/DVD player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive

(HDD). Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in

(16.5 cm) touch screen allows for easy menu selection.

The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System

(GPS)-based Navigation system.

Refer to your Multimedia system (REN) or Navigation

(RER) user's manual for detailed operating instructions.

Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition

System (VR) — If Equipped

For the radio, refer to "Voice Recognition System (VR)" in

Section 3.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201

Operating Instructions — Hands-Free

Communication (UConnect姞) — If Equipped

Refer to "Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)" in

Section 3.

Clock Setting Procedure

Global Positioning System (GPS) — RER only

The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to

the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The

satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the

worldwide standard for time. This makes the system's

clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and

daylight savings information is set.

To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN

1. Turn on the multimedia system.

2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.

3. Touch the screen where "User Clock" is displayed. The

clock setting menu will appear on the screen.

4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the

word "Hour" with the arrow pointing upward is dis-

played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen

where the word "Hour" with the arrow pointing down-

ward is displayed.

5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where

the word "Min" with the arrow pointing upward is

displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the

screen where the word "Min" with the arrow pointing

downward is displayed.

6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where

the word "Save" is displayed.

202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Changing Daylight Savings Time

When selected, this feature will display the time of day in

daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the

current setting:

1. Turn on the multimedia system.

2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The

clock setting menu will appear on the screen.

3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in

the box next to the words "Daylight Savings." Touch the

screen where the words "Daylight Savings" are dis-

played to change the current setting.

Show Time if Radio is Off

When selected, this feature will display the time of day on

the touch screen when the multimedia system is turned

off. Proceed as follows to change the current setting:

1. Turn on the multimedia system.

2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The

clock setting menu will appear on the screen.

3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in

the box next to the words "Show Time if Radio is Off."

Touch the screen where the words "Show Time if Radio is

Off" are displayed to change the current setting.

Changing the Time Zone

1. Turn on the multimedia system.

2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The

clock setting menu will appear on the screen.

3. Touch the screen where the words "Set Time Zone" are

displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on

the screen.

4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your

selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you

want to select, touch the screen where the word "Page" is

displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.

5. Touch the screen where the word "Save" is displayed.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203

SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO

WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right

side of the radio faceplate.

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

position to operate the radio.

Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the

radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second

time to turn off the radio.

Electronic Volume Control

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360

degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning

the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the

volume, and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be

set at the same volume level as last played.

RES Radio

204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SEEK Buttons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next

listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio

will remain tuned to the new station until you make

another selection. Holding either button will bypass

stations without stopping, until you release it.

TIME Button

Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time

and frequency display.

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob.

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes

will begin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control

knob to save time change.

5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons

causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the

direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either

AM or FM frequencies.

TUNE Control

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise

to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS

will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to

the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second

time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL

control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the

mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third

time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL

control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the

treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth

time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/

SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the

sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time

and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control

knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between

the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to

exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

AM/FM Button

Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton

Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to

commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND

button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display

window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto

this station and press and release that button. If a button

is not selected within five seconds after pressing the

SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but

will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by

repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press

the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the

display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and

SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM

206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.

The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by

pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding

button number will display.

Buttons1-6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you

commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM

stations).

DISC Button

Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from

AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And

MP3 Audio Play

NOTE:

•

The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

position to operate the radio.

•

This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),

recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact

discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and

multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

Inserting Compact Disc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD

label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into

the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the

radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than

1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be

ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio

ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and

begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will

show the disc number, the track number, and index time

in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of

track 1.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207

CAUTION!

•

This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs

only. The use of other sized discs may damage the

CD player mechanism.

•

Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel

away and jam the player mechanism.

•

RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert

a second CD if one is already loaded.

•

Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the

other side is a CD) should not be used, and they

can cause damage to the player.

EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within

10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,

the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on

convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

SEEK Button

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the

CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning

of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the

previous selection if the CD is within the first second of

the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK

button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in

CD and MP3 modes.

TIME Button

Press this button to change the display from a large CD

playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

RW/FF

Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of

the current CD track/title.

Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD

player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or

RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)

button works in a similar manner.

AM/FM Button

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate

Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the

compact disc in random order to provide an interesting

change of pace.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-

domly selected track.

Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.

Notes on Playing MP3 Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file

recording media and formats are limited. When writing

MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

Supported Media (Disc Types)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are

CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660

Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.

When reading discs recorded using formats other than

ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read

files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-

mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

•

Maximum number of folder levels: 8

•

Maximum number of files: 255

•

Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file

names and folder names is limited. For large numbers

of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to

display the file name and folder name, and will assign

a number instead. With a maximum number of files,

exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With

200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this

display.)

•

Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

•

Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙ .⬙ and a three-

character extension)

•

Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙ .⬙ and a three-

character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.

Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal

CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).

Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after

writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of

multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in

longer disc loading times.

Supported MP3 File Formats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-

sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3

extension may cause playback problems. The radio is

designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will

not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to

an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the

following table are supported. In addition, variable bit

210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files

use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or

VBR bit rate.

MPEG

Specification Sampling

Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)

MPEG-1 Audio

Layer 3 48, 44.1, 32

320, 256, 224,

192, 160, 128,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32

MPEG-2 Audio

Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16

160, 128, 144,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32, 24,

16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title

are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not

supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not

supported.

Playback of MP3 Files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the

radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium

contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more

time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected

by the following:

•

Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than

CD-R media

•

Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer

to load than non-multisession discs

•

Number of files and folders - Loading times will

increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended

to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a

single-session disc, enable the "Disc at Once" option

before writing to the disc.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which

allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an

MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle's

audio system to amplify the source and play through the

vehicle speakers.

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to

auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the

device's volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is

not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX

audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)

Press this button to change the display to time of day. The

time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is

OFF).

SALES CODE RES/RSC — AM/FM STEREO

RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND

SIRIUS RADIO

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right

side of the radio faceplate.

RES/RSC Radio

212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operating Instructions — Radio Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

position to operate the radio.

Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the

radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second

time to turn off the radio.

Electronic Volume Control

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360

degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the

ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the

volume and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be

set at the same volume level as last played.

SEEK Buttons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next

listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio

will remain tuned to the new station until you make

another selection. Holding either button will bypass

stations without stopping until you release it.

Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If Equipped

Refer to "Voice Recognition System (VR)" in Section 3.

Voice Recognition Button (UConnect威Hands-Free

Phone) — If Equipped

Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone

(UConnect威 ) feature (if equipped). Refer to "Hands-Free

Communication (UConnect威)" in Section 3.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not

available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With

UConnect" message will display on the radio screen.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213

Phone Button (UConnect威Hands-Free Phone) — If

Equipped

Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone

(UConnect威 ) feature (if equipped). Refer to "Hands-Free

Communication (UConnect威)" in Section 3.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not

available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With

UConnect" message will display on the radio screen.

TIME Button

Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time

and frequency display.

Clock Setting Procedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.

2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob.

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes

will begin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/

SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control

knob to save time change.

5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.

The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.

For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the

SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select

SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,

starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite

radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above

procedure, starting at Step 2.

214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INFO Button

Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call

letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text

message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons

causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the

direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either

AM or FM frequencies.

TUNE Control

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise

to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS

will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to

the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second

time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL

control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the

mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third

time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL

control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the

treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth

time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/

SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the

sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time

and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control

knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between

the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to

exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215

MUSIC TYPE Button

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type

mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button

or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five

seconds will allow the program format type to be se-

lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast

Music Type information.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following

format types:

Program Type 16-Digit Character

Display

No program type or un-

defined None

Adult Hits Adlt Hit

Classical Classicl

Classic Rock Cls Rock

College College

Country Country

Program Type 16-Digit Character

Display

Foreign Language Language

Information Inform

Jazz Jazz

News News

Nostalgia Nostalga

Oldies Oldies

Personality Persnlty

Public Public

Rhythm and Blues R & B

Religious Music Rel Musc

Religious Talk Rel Talk

Rock Rock

Soft Soft

Soft Rock Soft Rck

Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B

216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Program Type 16-Digit Character

Display

Sports Sports

Talk Talk

Top 40 Top 40

Weather Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon

is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency

station with the same selected Music Type name. The

Music Type function only operates when in the FM

mode.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type

(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be

exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

SETUP Button

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between

the following items:

•

Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow

you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control

knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the

TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.

Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save

changes.

AM/FM Button

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton

Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to

commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND

button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display

window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto

this station and press and release that button. If a button

is not selected within five seconds after pressing the

SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but

will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by

repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press

the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the

display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and

SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM

and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.

The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by

pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding

button number will display.

Buttons1-6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you

commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM

stations).

DISC/AUX Button

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch

from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.

Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and

MP3 Audio Play

NOTE:

•

The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

position to operate the radio.

•

This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),

recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact

discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and

multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

Inserting Compact Disc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD

label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into

the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the

radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than

1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be

ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio

ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and

begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will

show the disc number, the track number, and index time

in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of

track 1.

CAUTION!

•

This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs

only. The use of other sized discs may damage the

CD player mechanism.

•

Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel

away and jam the player mechanism.

•

RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert

a second CD if one is already loaded.

•

Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the

other side is a CD) should not be used, and they

can cause damage to the player.

EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within

10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,

the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on

convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

SEEK Button

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the

CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning

of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the

previous selection if the CD is within the first second of

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219

the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK

button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in

CD and MP3 modes.

TIME Button

Press this button to change the display from a large CD

playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF

Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of

the current CD track/title.

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will

begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or

another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button

works in a similar manner.

AM/FM Button

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate

Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the

compact disc in random order to provide an interesting

change of pace.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-

domly selected track.

Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-

dom Play.

Notes On Playing MP3 Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3

file recording media and formats are limited. When

writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-

tions.

Supported Media (Disc Types)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are

CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660

Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.

When reading discs recorded using formats other than

ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read

files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-

mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

•

Maximum number of folder levels: 8

•

Maximum number of files: 255

•

Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file

names and folder names is limited. For large numbers

of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to

display the file name and folder name and will assign

a number instead. With a maximum number of files,

exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With

200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this

display.)

•

Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

•

Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙ .⬙ and a three-

character extension)

•

Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙ .⬙ and a three-

character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.

Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal

CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).

Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after

writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of

multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in

longer disc loading times.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221

Supported MP3 File Formats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-

sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3

extension may cause playback problems. The radio is

designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will

not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to

an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the

following table are supported. In addition, variable bit

rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files

use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or

VBR bit rates.

MPEG Specifi-

cation Sampling

Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)

MPEG-1 Audio

Layer 3 48, 44.1, 32

320, 256, 224,

192, 160, 128,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32

MPEG Specifi-

cation Sampling

Frequency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)

MPEG-2 Audio

Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16

160, 128, 144,

112, 96, 80, 64,

56, 48, 40, 32, 24,

16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title

are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not

supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not

supported.

Playback of MP3 Files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the

radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium

contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more

time to start playing the MP3 files.

222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected

by the following:

•

Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than

CD-R media

•

Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer

to load than non-multisession discs

•

Number of files and folders - Loading times will

increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended

to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a

single-session disc, enable the "Disc at Once" option

before writing to the disc.

LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders

on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by

turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a

folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will

begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the

next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain

playable files).

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through

the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File

Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed

time⬙ priority mode.

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or

more and the radio will display song titles for each file.

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds

to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223

Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which

allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an

MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle's

audio system to amplify the source and play through the

vehicle speakers.

Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-

iary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the

device's volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio

is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the

AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume

down.

TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)

Press this button to change the display to time of day. The

time of day will display for five seconds (when the

ignition is OFF).

Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone

(UConnect威 ) (If Equipped)

Refer to "Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)" in

Section 3.

Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If

Equipped)

Refer to "Satellite Radio" in this section.

UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) — IF

EQUIPPED

NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/

REL/RET radios only with UConnect威. For sales code

RER, REN and REZ touch-screen radio UCI feature, refer

to the separate RER, REN or REZ User's Manual. UCI is

available only if equipped as an option with these radios.

This feature allows you to plug an iPod威into the

vehicle's sound system through a 16–pin connector using

the provided interface cable.

224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威and

iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威software versions may not

fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple's

website for software updates.

NOTE:

•

If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod威to this

port does not play the media. For playing an iPod威,

use the separate 16–pin connector port (in the glove

compartment on some vehicles).

•

Connecting an iPod威to the AUX port located in the

radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI

feature to control the connected device.

Connecting The iPod姞

Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod威to

the vehicle's 16–pin connector port (which is located in

the glove compartment on some vehicles). Once the

iPod威 is connected and synchronized to the vehicle's UCI

system (iPod威may take a few seconds to connect), the

iPod威 starts charging and is ready for use by pressing

radio switches, as described below.

NOTE:

•

You may have to remove the connector pin protection

cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to connect-

ing the cable.

•

If the iPod威battery is completely discharged, it may

not communicate with the UCI system until a mini-

mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod威connected

to the UCI system may charge it to the required level.

Using This Feature

By using the optional connection cable to connect an

iPod威 to the vehicle's UCI 16–pin connector port:

•

The iPod威audio can be played on the vehicle's sound

system, providing metadata (Artist, track title, album,

etc.) information on the radio display.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225

•

The iPod威can be controlled using the radio buttons to

Play, Browse, and List the iPod威contents.

•

The iPod威 battery charges when plugged into the UCI

connector.

Controlling The iPod姞Using Radio Buttons

To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected

iPod威 , press the 'AUX' button on the radio faceplate.

Once in the UCI (iPod威) mode, iPod威audio tracks (if

available from iPod威) start playing over the vehicle's

audio system.

Play Mode

When switched to UCI mode, the iPod威automatically

starts Play mode. In Play mode, you may use the

following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the

iPod威 and display data:

•

Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or

previous track.

•

Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while

playing a track, skips to the next track.

•

Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one

click, during the first two seconds of the track, will

jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this

button at any other time in the track, will jump to

the beginning of the current track.

•

Jump backward in the current track by pressing and

holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW

button long enough will take you to the beginning

of the current track.

•

Jump forward in the current track by pressing and

holding the FF >> button.

•

A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will

jump backward or forward respectively, for five

seconds.

226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

•

Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the

previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is

pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will

jump to the previous track in the list, if you press this

button at any other time in the track it will jump to the

beginning of the track. If you press the SEEK >>

button during play mode, it will jump to the next track

in the list.

•

While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see

the associated metadata (Artist, track title, album, etc.)

for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps

to the next screen of data for that track. Once you have

seen all screens, the last INFO button press will take

you back to the play mode screen on the radio.

•

Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod威

mode to repeat the current playing track.

•

Press the SCAN button to use iPod威scan mode, which

will play the first five seconds of each track in the

current list and then forward to the next song. To stop

SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when

it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again.

During Scan mode you can also press the << SEEK

and SEEK >> buttons to select the previous and next

tracks.

•

RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):

Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and

Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威 .IftheRND icon is

showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is

ON.

List Or Browse Mode

During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described

below, takes you to List mode. List mode enables you to

scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod威.

•

TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions

in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227

•

Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-

wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying

the track detail on the radio display. Once you have

the track to be played highlighted on the radio

display, press the TUNE control knob to select and

start playing the track. Turning the TUNE control

knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During

fast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updating

the information on the radio display.

•

During all List modes, the iPod威displays all lists in

"wrap-around" mode. So if the track is at the

bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards

(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.

•

In List mode, the radio PRESET Buttons are used as

shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威.

•

Preset 1 – Playlists

•

Preset 2 – Artists

•

Preset 3 – Albums

•

Preset 4 – Genres

•

Preset 5 - Audiobooks

•

Preset 6 – Podcasts

•

Pressing a PRESET button, will display the current

list on the top line and the first item in that list on

the second line.

•

To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the

same PRESET button again to go back to Play

mode.

•

LIST button: The LIST button will display the top

level menu of the iPod威. Turn the TUNE control knob

to list the top-menu item you wish to select and press

the TUNE control knob. This will display the next

sub-menu list item on the iPod威then you can follow

228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

the same steps to go to the desired track in that list.

Not all iPod威sub-menu levels are available on this

system.

•

MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is

another shortcut button to the genre listing on your

iPod威.

CAUTION!

•

Leaving the iPod威(or any supported device) any-

where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can

alter the operation, or damage the device. Follow

the device manufacturer's guidelines.

•

Placing items on the iPod威, or connections to the

iPod威 in the vehicle, can cause damage to the

device and/or to the connectors.

WARNING!

Do not plug in or remove the iPod威while driving.

Failure to following this warning could result in an

accident.

SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED

(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU RADIOS ONLY)

Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-

ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to

coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite

Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,

sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-

dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.

NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has

limited coverage in Alaska.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229

System Activation

Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated and you

may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio

service that is included with the factory-installed satellite

radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-

come kit that contains general information, including

how to setup your on-line listening account at no addi-

tional charge. For further information, call the toll-free

number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at

www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Cana-

dian residents.

Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID)

Please have the following information available when

calling:

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification

Number (ESN/SID).

2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios

With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-

tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll

using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is

selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the

Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number

display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on

the radio to exit this screen.

ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios

While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio

faceplate.

Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.

All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.

ESN/SID Access With REU Radio

While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio

faceplate.

230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center

of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and

release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your

vehicle will display.

Selecting Satellite Mode

Press the SAT button until ⬙ SAT⬙ appears in the display. A

CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio

mode.

Satellite Antenna

To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the

roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to

the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).

Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the

antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-

gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward

as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not

place items directly on or above the antenna.

Reception Quality

Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the

following reasons:

•

The vehicle is parked in an underground parking

structure or under a physical obstacle.

•

Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the

form of short audio mutes.

•

Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can

cause intermittent reception.

•

Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can

cause signal blockage.

Operating Instructions — Satellite Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC

position to operate the radio.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231

SEEK Buttons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next

channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek

up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will

remain tuned to the new channel until you make another

selection. Holding either button will bypass channels

without stopping until you release it.

SCAN Button (When Equipped)

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for

the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-

tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN

button a second time.

INFO Button — Except REU Radio

Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-

tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-

able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an

additional three seconds will make the radio display the

song title all of the time (press and hold again to return to

normal display).

INFO Button — REU Radio

Pressing the INFO button will display information about

Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing

the INFO button again will close the INFO screen.

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons

causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the

direction of the arrows.

TUNE Control (Rotary)

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise

to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.

232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

MUSIC TYPE Button — Except REU Radio

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type

mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button

or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five

seconds will allow the program format type to be se-

lected.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music

type.

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type

function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next

channel with the same selected Music Type name.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type

(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be

exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.

MUSIC TYPE Button — REU Radio

Pressing this button provides a Music Type list from

which you can make a selection. Once a selection is

made, you can seek up or down or scan the channels and

the radio will tune to the next station matching the

selected format. There is no time-out for this screen.

Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the

Music Type screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down, and

scan will no longer be based on your selection.

SETUP Button

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the

following items:

•

Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/

SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This

number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the

Sirius subscription.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233

SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a channel that you wish to

commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.

The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.

Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel

and press and release that button. If a button is not

selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-

ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be

stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by

repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press

the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display

window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This

allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into

pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2

memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton

twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding

button number will display.

Buttons1-6

These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you

commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).

Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If

Equipped)

Refer to "Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)" in

Section 3.

Operating Instructions — Video Entertainment

System (VES)™ (If Equipped)

Refer to separate "Video Entertainment System (VES)™

Guide."

234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED

The remote sound system controls are located on the rear

surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to

access the switches.

The right-hand control is a rocker type switch with a

pushbutton in the center. Pressing the top of the switch

will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the

switch will decrease the volume.

The button located in the center of the right-hand control

will switch modes to Radio or CD.

The left-hand control is a rocker type switch with a

pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand

control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand control operation in

each mode.

Radio Operation

Press the top of the switch to SEEK up for the next

listenable station. Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK

down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left-hand control

will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-

grammed in the radio preset pushbuttons.

Remote Sound System Controls

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235

CD Player

Press the top of the switch once to go to the next track on

the CD. Press the bottom of the switch once to go to the

beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the

previous track, if it is within one second after the current

track begins to play.

If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the

second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.

The button in the center of the left-hand switch changes

CD's on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This

button does not function for all other radios.

CD/DVD MAINTENANCE

To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following

precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the

surface.

2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,

wiping from center to edge.

3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-

ing the disc.

4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,

or antistatic sprays.

5. Store the disc in its case after playing.

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become

too high.

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-

lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e. scratched, reflective

coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)

oversized, or have theft protection encoding. Try a

known good disc before considering disc player service.

236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES

Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in

your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from

your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated

by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition

is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance

does not satisfactorily "clear" by the repositioning of the

antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be

turned down or off during cellular phone operation.

CLIMATE CONTROLS

Manual Heating, Ventilation And Air Conditioning

(HVAC) System

The Manual Heating, Ventilation And Air Conditioning

(HVAC) System allows you to balance the temperature,

amount, and direction of air circulating throughout the

vehicle. The controls are located on the instrument panel,

below the radio.

The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains

R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer

in the upper atmosphere.

Climate Controls

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237

The controls are as follows:

Mode Control (Air Direction)

The mode control allows you to

choose from several patterns of air

distribution as identified by the

symbols.

Panel

Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument

panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct air flow.

Bi-Level

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the

upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer

air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved

comfort during sunny but cool conditions.

Floor

Air is directed through the floor outlets and side

window demister outlets with a small amount

through the defrost outlet.

Mix

Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side

window demister outlets. This setting works best in

cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at

the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining

comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Defrost

Air is directed through the windshield and side

window demister outlets. Use this mode with

maximum fan and temperature settings for best wind-

shield and side window defrosting.

238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in

both Mix and Defrost even if the Air Conditioning

Snowflake button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the

air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy,

use these modes only when necessary.

Air Outlets

The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can

be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control

air flow.

NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear seat passen-

gers, the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed, so

that the left center outlet is directed toward the right rear

passenger and the right center outlet is directed toward

the left rear passenger.

Fan Control

Use this control to regulate the

amount of air forced through the

system in any mode you select.

The fan speed increases as you

move the control from left (OFF)

to right.

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the

climate controls will not function during Remote Start

operation if the fan control is left in the "O" (Off)

position.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239

Temperature Control

Use this control to regulate the

temperature of the air inside the

passenger compartment. The blue

area of the scale indicates cooler

temperatures while the red area

indicates warmer temperatures.

NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems

lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-

denser: located in front of the radiator, for an accumula-

tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray

from behind the radiator and through the condenser.

Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the

condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.

Circulation Control

Use this button to choose between

outside air intake or recirculation

of the air inside the vehicle. A

lamp will illuminate when you

are in recirculate mode. Only use

the recirculate mode to tempo-

rarily block out any outside odors,

smoke, or dust and to cool the

interior rapidly upon initial start

up in very hot or humid weather.

NOTE: Continuous use of the recirculate mode may

make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may

occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculate

position will cause windows to fog on the inside because

of moisture build up inside the vehicle. For maximum

defogging, select the Outside Air position.

240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor, mix

or defrost modes.

Air Conditioning (A/C)

A/C Operation

Use this button to engage the Air

Conditioning. A lamp will illumi-

nate when the Air Conditioning

System is engaged. Once the air

conditioning is engaged, use a

combination of the mode control,

fan speed control, and tempera-

ture control to achieve your de-

sired interior temperature.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage

until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.

MAX A/C

For maximum cooling select the

air direction to either the Panel or

Bi-Level position using the mode

control. Press the A/C button and

the recirculation button so that

both lamps are illuminated and

set the temperature control to its

coolest setting.

NOTE:

•

Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor, mix or

defrost modes.

•

See "Circulation Control" in this section, for proper or

extended use of this position.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241

Air Filtration System — If Equipped

An air filter is included in the optional Security Group.

Filter media includes a particle filtration layer. The filter

will reduce, but not eliminate, diesel and agricultural

smells. The filter acts only on air coming from outside the

vehicle; it does not filter air inside the passenger com-

partment. See the maintenance schedule for the filter

change interval. The air filter change interval coincides

with engine oil and filter change intervals. As with oil

changes, the interval is shorter for heavy duty service or

dusty conditions. See your authorized dealer for service.

242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operating Tips

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243

Window Fogging

Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild

rainy or humid weather. To clear the windows, set mode

to the mix or defrost position. Direct the panel outlets

toward the side windows. Do not use recirculate without

A/C for long periods as fogging may occur.

Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-

moved by using the defrost position.

If the fogging problem persists, clean the inside window

surfaces. The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collect-

ing on the inside surface of the glass.

NOTE: In cold weather, the use of the recircu-

late position will cause windows to fog on the

inside because of moisture build up inside the

vehicle. Moisture and ice can also accumulate

on the inside of the sheet metal and may result in

headliner and/or electronic component damage. For

maximum defogging, press the recirculation button until

recirculate is off.

Summer Operation

Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high-

quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion

protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for

protection against overheating. A 50% concentration is

recommended.

Outside Air Intake

When operating the system during the winter months,

make sure the air intake, directly in front of the wind-

shield, is free of ice, slush, snow or other obstructions

such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air-intake plenum

may reduce air flow and plug the plenum water drains.

The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use

only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of

vehicle operation.

244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Side Window Demisters

A side window demister outlet is at each end of the

instrument panel. These nonadjustable outlets direct air

toward the side windows when the system is in either the

FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at

the area of the windows through which you view the

outside mirrors.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

䡵Starting Procedures .................... 251

▫Manual Transmission — If Equipped ....... 251

▫Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ..... 251

▫Normal Starting ..................... 252

▫Extremely Cold Weather

(Below ⫺20°F Or ⫺ 29°C) ............... 252

▫If Engine Fails To Start ................. 253

▫After Starting ....................... 253

䡵Manual Transaxle — If Equipped ........... 254

▫5–Speed Manual Transaxle .............. 254

▫Recommended Shift Speeds ............. 255

▫Downshifting ....................... 255

䡵Automatic Transaxle — If Equipped ......... 256

▫Brake/Transmission Interlock System ...... 257

▫Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock

System ............................ 257

▫Gear Ranges ........................ 258

䡵AutoStick 威— If Equipped ............... 260

▫Operation .......................... 260

▫General Information ................... 261

䡵Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped . . . 261

䡵Driving On Slippery Surfaces ............. 262

▫Acceleration ........................ 262

▫Traction ........................... 263

䡵Driving Through Water .................. 263

▫Flowing/Rising Water ................. 263

▫Shallow Standing Water ................ 264

䡵Power Steering ........................ 265

▫Power Steering Fluid Check ............. 266

䡵Parking Brake ........................ 267

䡵Brake System ......................... 268

▫Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) —

If Equipped ......................... 269

䡵Electronic Brake Control System ........... 272

▫Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 272

▫Traction Control System (TCS) ........... 272

▫Brake Assist System (BAS) .............. 273

▫Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) .......... 274

▫Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ......... 275

䡵Tire Safety Information .................. 279

▫Tire Markings ....................... 279

▫Tire Identification Number (TIN) .......... 283

▫Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ........... 284

248 STARTING AND OPERATING

䡵Tires — General Information .............. 288

▫Tire Pressure ........................ 288

▫Tire Inflation Pressures ................. 289

▫Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation .... 291

▫Radial Ply Tires ...................... 291

▫Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped ........ 292

▫Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped ......... 292

▫Tire Spinning ....................... 293

▫Tread Wear Indicators ................. 294

▫Life Of Tire ......................... 294

▫Replacement Tires .................... 295

䡵Tire Chains .......................... 297

䡵Snow Tires .......................... 297

䡵Tire Rotation Recommendations ............ 297

䡵Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..... 298

▫Base System ........................ 301

▫Premium System — If Equipped .......... 303

▫General Information ................... 307

䡵Fuel Requirements ..................... 307

▫Reformulated Gasoline ................. 308

▫Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............. 308

▫E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...... 309

▫MMT In Gasoline .................... 309

▫Materials Added To Fuel ............... 310

▫Fuel System Cautions .................. 310

▫Carbon Monoxide Warnings ............. 311

STARTING AND OPERATING 249

䡵Adding Fuel ......................... 312

▫Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ............... 312

▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 313

䡵Vehicle Loading ....................... 314

▫Vehicle Certification Label .............. 314

䡵Trailer Towing ........................ 316

▫Common Towing Definitions ............ 316

▫Trailer Hitch Classification .............. 318

▫Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer

Weight Ratings) ...................... 319

▫Trailer And Tongue Weight .............. 320

▫Towing Requirements ................. 321

▫Towing Tips ........................ 326

䡵Recreational Towing

(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) ................. 327

▫Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The

Ground) ........................... 327

250 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING PROCEDURES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both

inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.

WARNING!

Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving

unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-

ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in the

ignition. A child could operate power windows,

other controls, or move the vehicle.

Manual Transmission — If Equipped

Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,

press the clutch pedal to the floor, and place the shift

lever in NEUTRAL.

NOTE:

•

The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is

pressed to the floor.

•

If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is

locked, rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve

pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the

key.

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL

position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes

before shifting to any driving gear.

NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting

out of PARK.

STARTING AND OPERATING 251

Normal Starting

Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does

not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal.

Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position

and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to

start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the

OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the

normal starting procedure.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it

started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-

axle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could

enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has

started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.

If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables

may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.

This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-

erly, so follow the procedure carefully. See Section 6

of this manual for jump-starting instructions.

Extremely Cold Weather (Below ⫺ 20°F Or ⫺29°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of

an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-

able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

252 STARTING AND OPERATING

If Engine Fails to Start

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the

"Normal Starting" procedure, it may be flooded. Push

the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it

there. Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds. This

should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.

Leave the ignition key in the ON position, release the

accelerator pedal and repeat the "Normal Starting" pro-

cedure.

WARNING!

Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the

throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start

the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing

serious personal injury.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the

engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to

15 seconds before trying again.

After Starting

The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine

warms up.

STARTING AND OPERATING 253

MANUAL TRANSAXLE — IF EQUIPPED

5–Speed Manual Transaxle

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you leave the

vehicle unattended without having the parking

brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-

ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,

especially on an incline.

Fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As

you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelera-

tor pedal. Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip a gear. Be

sure the transaxle is in 1st gear, (not 3rd), when starting

from a standing position. Damage to the clutch can result

from starting in 3rd gear.

Shift Pattern

254 STARTING AND OPERATING

For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only

the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light

accelerations, 5th gear is recommended.

Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,

and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch

pedal partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear

on the clutch.

Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a

complete stop.

NOTE: During cold weather, until the transaxle lubri-

cant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift

efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle.

Recommended Shift Speeds

To use your manual transaxle for optimal fuel economy,

it should be upshifted as listed in the following table.

Manual Transaxle Recommended Shift Speeds

Units in mph (km/h)

Engine

Size

Accel-

eration

Rate 1to2 2to3 3to4 4to5

All En-

gines

Accel 14 (23) 23 (37) 29 (47) 45 (72)

Cruise 12 (19) 18 (29) 25 (40) 32 (52)

Downshifting

Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and

prolong engine life.

CAUTION!

If you skip more than one gear while downshifting

or downshift at too high a vehicle speed, you could

damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.

STARTING AND OPERATING 255

To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift

down to 2nd or 1st gear when descending a steep grade.

When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade,

downshift early so that the engine will not be

overburdened.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE — IF EQUIPPED

NOTE: The Continuously Variable Automatic Transaxle

(CVT) changes ratios in a continuous manner. This may

sometimes "feel" as if it is slipping, but this is normal and

does not harm anything.

CAUTION!

Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following

precautions are not observed:

•

Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to

a complete stop.

•

Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the

vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine

is at idle speed.

•

Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL

into any forward gear when the engine is above

idle speed.

•

Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot

is firmly on the brake pedal.

NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down

while shifting out of PARK.

256 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or

NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle

speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,

the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in

reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear when the

engine is idling normally and when your right foot is

firmly on the brake pedal.

Brake/Transmission Interlock System

This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out

of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is

pressed. This system is active only while the ignition

switch is in the ON or ACC positions. Always depress the

brake pedal first, before moving the shift lever out of

PARK.

NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the transaxle will not

shift out of PARK. Battery power is required to release the

brake/transmission interlock system. There is a remov-

able plug in the right side of the shift lever housing that

allows you to insert your finger to override the system.

The key must be in the ignition and in the ON position to

use the override lever. If this occurs obtain service as

soon as possible.

Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System

This system prevents the key from being removed unless

the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of

PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON position, and

the brake pedal is depressed.

NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the

key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety

feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and

stopped, but the key cannot be removed, until you obtain

service.

STARTING AND OPERATING 257

Gear Ranges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or

NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.

PARK

Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmis-

sion. The engine can be started in this range. Never use

PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking

brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. Always

apply the parking brake first, and then place the shift

lever in the PARK position.

WARNING!

Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,

you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always

shift the vehicle into PARK, remove the key from the

ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the key

is removed from the ignition, the shift lever is locked

in the PARK position, securing the vehicle against

unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should never

leave unattended children inside a vehicle.

Shift Lever

258 STARTING AND OPERATING

The following indicators should be used to ensure that

you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:

•

When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever

all the way forward until it stops.

•

Look at the shift indicator window on the shift lever

bezel to ensure it is in the PARK position.

•

You must depress the brake pedal to move the shift

lever out of the PARK position.

CAUTION!

Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must

turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the steering

wheel and shift lever are released. Otherwise, dam-

age to the steering column or shift lever could result.

You must also depress the brake pedal.

REVERSE

Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a

complete stop.

NEUTRAL

The engine may be started in this range.

DRIVE

This should be used for most driving and provides the

best ratio for optimum drivability, fuel economy, and

performance.

STARTING AND OPERATING 259

AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED

Autostick威 is a driver-interactive transmission that offers

six manual ratio changes to provide you with more

control. Autostick威 allows you to maximize engine brak-

ing, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and

improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also

provide you with more control during passing, city driv-

ing, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer

towing, and many other situations. Automatic ratio

changes upward will only occur to protect the Continu-

ously Variable Automatic Transaxle (CVT) and/or the

engine from overspeed. Changes down will only happen

at minimum engine speed to prevent stalling.

Operation

NOTE: Autostick威 is not functional until the CVT

warms up in cold weather.

Autostick威 operation is activated in the DRIVE position

by moving the shift lever side-to-side. Moving the shift

lever to the (+) side will activate Autostick威and shift up

to the next higher manual ratio, unless you are already

operating in or near Overdrive, in which case 6th ratio

will be selected. In like manner, moving the shift lever to

(-) will activate Autostick威and shift to the next lower

manual ratio. After Autostick威 is activated, the manual

ratio selected is displayed in the transmission ratio

display and tipping the shift lever to the (+) or (-)

direction will cause an upshift or downshift by one ratio.

Autostick威 is deactivated:

•

By holding the shift lever to (+) momentarily

•

When the shift lever is shifted out of DRIVE

•

When in 6th position, touching the shift lever to the

right

•

When heavy Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) applica-

tion is detected

260 STARTING AND OPERATING

General Information

•

If a ratio other than 1st is selected and the vehicle is

brought to a stop, the transaxle control logic will

automatically select the 1st gear ratio.

•

If a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to

the rev limit, the transaxle will automatically select the

next higher ratio.

•

If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed,

that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.

However. the CVT will stay in the manually selected

ratio.

•

If the system detects powertrain overheating, the

transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode

and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.

•

If the system detects a problem, it will disable the

Autostick威 mode and the transmission will return to

the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF

EQUIPPED

This feature provides full time, on-demand, four–wheel

drive (4WD).

Four-Wheel Drive Switch

STARTING AND OPERATING 261

Where one or more wheels have wheel spin or if addi-

tional traction is needed in sand, deep snow, or loose

traction surfaces, activate the 4WD LOCK switch by

pulling up once and releasing. This locks the center

coupling allowing more torque to be sent to the rear

wheels. The 4WD Indicator Light will come on in the

cluster. This can be done on the fly, at any vehicle speed.

To deactivate, simply pull on the switch one more time.

The 4WD Indicator Light will then go out.

NOTE: Refer to Electronic Stability Program (ESP) in the

"Electronic Brake Control System" section of this manual

for additional information.

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

Acceleration

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-

pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-

cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when

there is a difference in the surface traction under the front

(driving) wheels.

WARNING!

Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.

Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the

front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle

and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and

carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction

(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).

262 STARTING AND OPERATING

Traction

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a

wedge of water to build up between the tire and road

surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or

complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To

reduce this possibility, the following precautions should

be observed:

1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are

slushy.

2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.

3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first

become visible.

4. Keep the tires properly inflated.

5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and

the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden

stop.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

Driving through water more than a few inches/

centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure

safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

Flowing/Rising Water

WARNING!

Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water

is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-

ing water can wear away the road or path's surface

and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.

Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry

your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this

warning may result in injuries that are serious or

fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

STARTING AND OPERATING 263

Shallow Standing Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through

shallow standing water, consider the following Caution

and Warning before doing so.

CAUTION!

•

Always check the depth of the standing water

before driving through it. Never drive through

standing water that is deeper than the bottom of

the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.

•

Determine the condition of the road or the path

that is under water and if there are any obstacles in

the way before driving through the standing wa-

ter.

•

Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving

through standing water. This will minimize wave

effects.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

•

Driving through standing water may cause dam-

age to your vehicle's drivetrain components. Al-

ways inspect your vehicle's fluids (i.e., engine oil,

transmission/transaxle, axle, etc.) for signs of con-

tamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in

appearance) after driving through standing water.

Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid

appears contaminated, as this may result in further

damage. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

•

Getting water inside your vehicle's engine can

cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious

internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not

covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

264 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

•

Driving through standing water limits your vehi-

cle's traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph

(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.

•

Driving through standing water limits your vehi-

cle's braking capabilities, which increases stop-

ping distances. Therefore, after driving through

standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on

the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.

•

Getting water inside your vehicle's engine can

cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you

stranded.

•

Failure to follow these warnings may result in

injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your

passengers, and others around you.

POWER STEERING

The standard power steering system will give you good

vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability

in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical

steering capability if power assist is lost.

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will

still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-

tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering

effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during

parking maneuvers.

NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering

wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate

that there is a problem with the power steering system.

Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering

pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is

due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This

noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any

way damage the steering system.

STARTING AND OPERATING 265

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced power steering

assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.

Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end

of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering

fluid temperature and it should be avoided when

possible. Damage to the power steering pump may

occur.

Power Steering Fluid Check

Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined

service interval is not required. The fluid should only be

checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are

apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-

pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-

rized dealer.

No chemical flushes should be used in any power

steering system; only the approved lubricant may be

used.

WARNING!

Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and

with the engine off to prevent injury from moving

parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do

not overfill. Use only manufacturer's recommended

power steering fluid.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated

level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all

surfaces. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine

Parts" in Section 7 for the correct fluid type.

266 STARTING AND OPERATING

PARKING BRAKE

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON,

the Brake Light in the instrument cluster will come on.

NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is

on. It does not show the degree of brake application.

If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is

moving, a chime will sound to alert the driver. The chime

will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle has

returned to a stop.

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking

brake is set. To set the parking brake, pull up firmly on

the lever. Also, place the shift lever in the PARK position

(automatic transaxle) or REVERSE position (manual

transaxle). To release the parking brake, apply the brake

pedal, pull up slightly on the lever, then depress the

button on the end of the lever and push the lever fully

down toward the floor.

NOTE: The parking brake lever will not release unless

the lever is pulled up slightly past its applied position.

When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking

brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise,

the load on the automatic transaxle locking mechanism

may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK.

As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the

curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a

uphill grade.

Parking Brake

STARTING AND OPERATING 267

You should always apply the parking brake before leav-

ing the vehicle.

WARNING!

•

Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving

unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in

the ignition. A child could operate power win-

dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

•

Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged

before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake

failure and an accident.

BRAKE SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as

standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for

any reason (for example, repeated brake applications

with the engine off), the brakes will still function. How-

ever, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much

greater than that required with the power system oper-

ating.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and

possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting

or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally

high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and

possible brake damage. You would not have your full

braking capacity in an emergency.

268 STARTING AND OPERATING

If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa-

bility, the remaining system will still function with some

loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident

by increased pedal travel during application and greater

pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the

malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake

fluid in the master cylinder drops, the brake warning

indicator will light.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-

ous. A significant decrease in braking performance or

vehicle stability during braking may occur. It will

take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your

vehicle harder to control. You could have an accident.

Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped

The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake

performance under most braking conditions. The system

automatically "pumps" the brakes during severe braking

conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.

WARNING!

•

Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish

their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.

Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just

press firmly on your brake pedal when you need

to slow down or stop.

•

The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-

ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase

braking or steering efficiency beyond that af-

forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and

tires or the traction afforded.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 269

WARNING! (Continued)

•

The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including

those resulting from excessive speed in turns,

following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-

planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver

can prevent accidents.

•

The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner which could jeopardize the user's safety

or the safety of others.

The ABS light monitors the ABS System. The

light will come on when the ignition switch is

turned to the ON position and may stay on for

as long as four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it

indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system

is not functioning and that service is required. However,

the conventional brake system will continue to operate

normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.

If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced

as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock

brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the

ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the

bulb repaired as soon as possible.

If both the Brake Warning light and the ABS light remain

on, the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to

the ABS is required.

When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you

may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some

related motor noises. These noises are the system per-

forming its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS

working properly. This self-check occurs each time the

vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).

270 STARTING AND OPERATING

ABS is activated during braking under certain road or

stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-

clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose

debris, or panic stops.

You may also experience the following when the brake

system goes into Anti-Lock mode:

•

the ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a

short time after the stop)

•

the clicking sound of solenoid valves

•

brake pedal pulsations

•

a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end

of the stop

These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophis-

ticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible

to interference caused by improperly installed or

high output radio transmitting equipment. This in-

terference can cause possible loss of Anti-Lock brak-

ing capability. Installation of such equipment should

be performed by qualified professionals.

All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and

type and tires must be properly inflated to produce

accurate signals for the computer.

STARTING AND OPERATING 271

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM

Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional ad-

vanced electronic brake control system that includes

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System

(TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitiga-

tion (ERM), and Electronic Stability Program (ESP). All

systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and

control in various driving conditions and are commonly

referred to as ESP.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control

under adverse braking conditions. The system controls

hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and

help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.

Refer to "Anti-Lock Brake System" in this section of the

manual for more information about ABS.

Traction Control System (TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of

the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake

pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine

power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and

stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to

a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin

across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is

spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the

brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine

torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.

This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in

either the "Partial Off" or "Full Off" modes. Refer to

"Electronic Stability Program (ESP)" in this Section of this

manual.

272 STARTING AND OPERATING

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle's braking

capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The

system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-

ing the rate and amount of brake application and then

applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help

reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very

quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the

benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-

ing pressure during the stopping sequence (do not

"pump" the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure

unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal

is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

•

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the

natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,

nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail-

ing road conditions.

•

The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including

those resulting from excessive speed in turns,

driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplan-

ing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can

prevent accidents.

•

The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner which could jeopardize the user's safety

or the safety of others.

STARTING AND OPERATING 273

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by

monitoring the driver's steering wheel input and the

speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate

of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed

are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the

brake of the appropriate wheel and may also reduce

engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will

occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or

evasive driving maneuvers.

ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring

during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It can not

prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road

conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or

other vehicles.

NOTE: Anytime the ESP system is in the "Full Off"

mode, ERM is disabled. Refer to "Electronic Stability

Program (ESP)" for a complete explanation of the avail-

able ESP modes.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-

tions and driving conditions, influence the chance

that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot

prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those

that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects

or other vehicles. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful

driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an

ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a

reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar-

dize the user's safety or the safety of others.

274 STARTING AND OPERATING

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

This system enhances directional control and stability of

the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP cor-

rects for over-steering or under-steering of the vehicle by

applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in

counteracting the over-steering or under-steering condi-

tion. Engine power may also be reduced to help the

vehicle maintain the desired path. ESP uses sensors in the

vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the

driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.

When the actual path does not match the intended path,

ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in

counteracting the over-steer or under-steer condition

•

Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

•

Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

ESP/TCS Indicator Light

The "ESP/TCS Indicator Light" located in the instrument

cluster, starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and

the ESP system becomes active. The "ESP/TCS Indicator

Light" also flashes when TCS is active. If the "ESP/TCS

Indicator Light" begins to flash during acceleration, ease

up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as

possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the

prevailing road conditions.

WARNING!

•

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) cannot prevent

the natural laws of physics from acting on the

vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by

prevailing road conditions.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 275

WARNING! (Continued)

•

ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those

resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on

very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a

safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent

accidents.

•

The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner which could jeopardize the user's safety

or the safety of others.

ESP Operating Modes

The ESP system has three available operating modes for

4WD equipped vehicles and two available operating

modes for 2WD equipped vehicles.

Full On (4WD Models) or On (2WD Models)

This is the normal operating mode for ESP. Whenever the

vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this "On"

mode. This mode should be used for most driving

situations. ESP should only be turned to "Partial Off" or

"ESP Off" for specific reasons as noted below.

Partial Off (4WD Models) or On (2WD Models)

This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP

OFF switch. When in "Partial Off" mode, the TCS portion

of ESP, except for the "limited slip" feature described in

the TCS section, has been disabled and the "ESP/TCS

Indicator Light" will be illuminated. All other stability

features of ESP function normally. This mode is intended

to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel

conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would nor-

mally allow is required to gain traction.

276 STARTING AND OPERATING

To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the ESP OFF

switch. This will restore the normal "ESP On" mode of

operation.

NOTE: To improve the vehicle's traction when driving

with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or

gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the "Partial Off"

mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch. Once the situation

requiring ESP to be switched to the "Partial Off" mode is

overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing

the ESP OFF switch. This may be done while the vehicle

is in motion.

Full Off (4WD Models Only)

This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use

when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu-

verability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered by

depressing and holding the ESP OFF switch for five

seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is

running. After five seconds, the "ESP/TCS Indicator

Light" will illuminate and the "ESP Off" message will

appear in the odometer. Press and release the Trip

Odometer button located on the instrument cluster to

clear this message.

In this mode, ESP and TCS, except for the "limited slip"

feature described in the TCS section, are turned off until

the vehicle reaches a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h). At

35 mph (56 km/h) the system returns to "Partial Off"

mode, as described above. TCS remains off. When the

vehicle speed drops below 30 mph (48 km/h) the ESP

system shuts off. ESP is deactivated at low vehicle speeds

so that it will not interfere with off-road driving however,

ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at

speeds above 35 mph (56 km/h). The "ESP/TCS Indica-

tor Light" will always be illuminated when ESP is off.

STARTING AND OPERATING 277

To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the ESP OFF

switch. This will restore the "ESP On" mode of operation.

NOTE: The "ESP OFF" message will display and an

audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed

into the PARK position from any other position, and then

moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if

the message was previously cleared.

WARNING!

With the ESP switched off, the enhanced vehicle

stability offered by ESP is unavailable. In an emer-

gency evasive maneuver, the ESP system will not

engage to assist in maintaining stability. "ESP Off"

mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use,

only.

ESP/BAS Warning Light and ESP/TCS Indicator

Light

The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with

the BAS indicator. The yellow "ESP/BAS Warning

Lamp" and the yellow "ESP/TCS Indicator Light" in the

instrument cluster both come on when the ignition

switch is turned to the ON position. They should both go

out with the engine running. If the "ESP/BAS Warning

Lamp" comes on continuously with the engine running,

a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or BAS

system, or both. If this light remains on after several

ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several

miles/kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph

(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible

to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

278 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

•

The "ESP Indicator Light" and the "ESP/BAS Warning

Light" come on momentarily each time the ignition

switch is turned ON.

•

Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System

will be ON even if it was turned off previously.

•

The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking

sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds

will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the

maneuver that caused the ESP activation.

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan-

dards Code (TIN) 4 — Maximum Load

2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure

3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades

STARTING AND OPERATING 279

NOTE:

•

P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P"

molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-

tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

•

European-Metric tire sizing is based on European

design standards. Tires designed to this standard have

the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with

the section width. The letter ⬙ P⬙ is absent from this tire

size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

•

LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric

tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the

letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preced-

ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

•

Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact

spares designed for temporary emergency use only.

Tires designed to this standard have the letter "T"

molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-

tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

•

High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design

standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded

into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

280 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Size Designation:

P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards

ⴖ....blank.... ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards

T= Temporary spare tire

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

— Ratio of section height to section width of tire

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R= Construction code

—⬙ R⬙ means radial construction

—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction

15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

STARTING AND OPERATING 281

EXAMPLE:

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H= Speed Symbol

— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to

its load index under certain operating conditions

— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under

specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and

posted speed limits)

Load Identification:

ⴖ....blank.... ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire

Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire

Light Load = Light load tire

C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure —

Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

282 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,

however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires

with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the

date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall

tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on

the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard

side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire

safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

—03 means the 3rd week.

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

—01 means the year 2001

— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year

in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

STARTING AND OPERATING 283

Tire Loading and Tire Pressure

Tire Placard Location

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed

on the driver's side B-Pillar.

Tire and Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about

the:

1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle

2) total weight your vehicle can carry

3) tire size designed for your vehicle

4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and

spare tires.

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed

the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You

will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you

adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire

inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading

Information placard and in the "Vehicle Loading" section

of this manual.

Tire and Loading Information Placard

284 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,

gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear

axles must not be exceeded. For further information on

GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to

"Vehicle Loading" in this section.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your

vehicle, locate the statement "The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or

XXX kg" on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and

trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed

the weight referenced here.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg"

on your vehicle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and

passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-

sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of

cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if "XXX"

amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five

150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of

available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs

(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs

[295 kg]).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo

being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely

exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in step 4.

STARTING AND OPERATING 285

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your

trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this reduces the available

cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE:

•

The following table shows examples on how to calcu-

late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities

of your vehicle with varying seating configurations

and number and size of occupants. This table is for

illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for

the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

•

For the following example, the combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs

(392 kg).

286 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING AND OPERATING 287

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading

can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and

increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the

recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never

overload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and

satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary

areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

Safety

WARNING!

•

Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can

cause accidents.

•

Underinflation increases tire flexing and can re-

sult in tire failure.

•

Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion

shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can

cause damage that result in tire failure.

•

Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-

lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

•

Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-

hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in

loss of vehicle control.

(Continued)

288 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-

hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to

the right or left.

•

Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-

mended cold tire inflation pressure.

Economy

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear

patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal

wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for

earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire

rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.

Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.

Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the

driver's side "B" Pillar.

Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure

Information for vehicle loads that are less than the

maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-

ditions will be found in the "Supplemental Tire Pressure

Information" section of this manual.

The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as

inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least

once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to

check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement

when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look

properly inflated even when they are underinflated.

STARTING AND OPERATING 289

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-

ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This

will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the

valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always

"cold tire inflation pressure." Cold tire inflation pressure

is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not

been driven for at least three hours or driven less than

1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire

inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-

tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range

of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with

temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per

12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind

when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in

the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the

outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire

inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),

which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this

outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)

during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure

build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

290 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds

within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-

tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high

speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very

important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle

loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-

tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire

dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading

and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-

mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your

tires could cause them to fail. You could have a

serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the

maximum capacity at continuous speeds above

75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires

on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle

poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-

ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or six, in the

case of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine

them with other types of tires.

Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in

the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your

authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.

STARTING AND OPERATING 291

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with

radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style

vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the

original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-

stalled at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

•

Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use

only. With these tires, do not drive more than

50 mph (80 km/h).

•

Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread life.

When the tread is worn to the tread wear indica-

tors, the temporary use spare tire needs to be

replaced.

•

Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to

your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare

tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a

conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the

wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.

Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel

on the vehicle at any given time.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take

your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the

compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may

result.

Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency

use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited-

use spare tire warning label located on the limited-use

spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the

original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your

292 STARTING AND OPERATING

vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare

tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,

replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the

vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use

only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects

vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more

than 50 mph (80 km/h). Keep it inflated to the cold

tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire plac-

ard or limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly.

Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first oppor-

tunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do

so could result in loss of vehicle control.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not

spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)

or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without

stopping when you are stuck.

For additional information, refer to "Freeing A Stuck

Vehicle" in Section 6.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-

age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-

one. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than

30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds

continuously when you are stuck, and do not let

anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the

speed.

STARTING AND OPERATING 293

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires

to help you in determining when your tires should be

replaced.

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread

grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth

becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the

tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this

point.

Life of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying

factors including, but not limited to:

•

Driving style

•

Tire pressure

•

Distance driven

1—WornTire

2—NewTire

294 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six

years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to

follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.

You could lose control and have an accident resulting

in serious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little

exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact

with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many

characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for

wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-

facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-

lent to the originals in size, quality and performance

when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on

"Tread Wear Indicators"). Refer to the "Tire and Loading

Information" placard for the size designation of your tire.

The service description and load identification will be

found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use

equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the

safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend

that you contact your original equipment or an autho-

rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire

specifications or capability.

STARTING AND OPERATING 295

WARNING!

•

Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than

that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations

of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-

pension dimensions and performance characteris-

tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and

braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-

able handling and stress to steering and suspen-

sion components. You could lose control and have

an accident resulting in serious injury or death.

Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings

approved for your vehicle.

•

Never use a tire with a smaller load index or

capacity other than what was originally equipped

on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load

index could result in tire overloading and failure.

You could lose control and have an accident.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having

adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire

failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size

may result in false speedometer and odometer read-

ings.

296 STARTING AND OPERATING

TIRE CHAINS

Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom-

mended.

CAUTION!

Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are

used.

SNOW TIRES

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires

during Winter. Standard tires are of the all-season type

and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S

designation on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and

type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only

in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the

safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what

was originally equipped with your vehicle and should

not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph

(120 km/h).

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at

different loads and perform different steering, driving,

and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at

unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat-

terns.

STARTING AND OPERATING 297

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.

The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with

aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type

tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain

mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a

smooth, quiet ride.

Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your

type of driving found in the "Maintenance Schedules"

section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-

sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear

should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

•

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn

the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle

recommended cold placard pressure.

•

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about

1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that

when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pres-

sure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set

based on "cold inflation tire pressure". This is defined

as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been

driven for at least three hours, or driven less than

1 mile (1 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire

inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum

298 STARTING AND OPERATING

inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer

to "Tires – General Information" in this section for

information on how to properly inflate the vehicle's

tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle

is driven - this is normal and there should be no

adjustment for this increased pressure.

•

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure

if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warn-

ing limit for any reason, including low temperature

effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.

•

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire

pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn

off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended

cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning

(Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you

must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold

placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring

Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically

update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

will turn off once the system receives the updated tire

pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to

20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the

TPMS to receive this information.

−

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended

cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure

of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F

(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),

a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire

pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire

pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle

may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi

(186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires

are inflated to the vehicle's recommended cold placard

pressure value.

STARTING AND OPERATING 299

CAUTION!

•

The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and

warnings have been established for the tire size

equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system

operation or sensor damage may result when us-

ing replacement equipment that is not of the same

size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can

cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire

sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is

equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors

may result.

•

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,

always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will

prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve

stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-

toring Sensor.

NOTE:

•

The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care

and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure

or condition.

•

The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge

while adjusting your tire pressure.

•

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes

the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire

tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and

stopping ability.

•

The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-

nance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain

correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even

if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger

illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

light.

300 STARTING AND OPERATING

•

Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,

and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in

the tire.

Base System

This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the

instrument cluster.

The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim

mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-

els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve

stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver

Module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the

tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly

and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

•

Receiver Module

•

Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

•

Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-

nate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will

be activated when one or more of the four active road tire

pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as

soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire

on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle's

recommended cold placard pressure value. The system

will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor-

ing Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures

have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven

for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive

this information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 301

Check TPMS Warnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on

and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system

fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a

chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will

repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the

fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur

with any of the following scenarios:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to

facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM

sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting

that affects radio wave signals.

3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare

wheel and tire assembly.

1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure

monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor

the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road

tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning

limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will

sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

will still turn ON due to the low tire.

3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-

utes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the Tire Pressure Moni-

toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds

and then remain on solid.

For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will

sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will

flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.

302 STARTING AND OPERATING

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and

reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare

tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long

as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning

limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may

need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph

(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this

information.

Premium System — If Equipped

The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim

mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-

els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve

stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver

module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the

tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain

the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

•

Receiver Module

•

Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors

•

Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four

wheel wells)

•

Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,

which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)

•

Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

STARTING AND OPERATING 303

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-

nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will

be activated when one or more of the four active road tire

pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once

every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects. In

addition, the EVIC will display a graphic of the pressure

value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing.

Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four

active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible

and inflate all tires that are flashing on the graphic

display to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pres-

sure value. The system will automatically update, the

Low Tire Pressure Display

304 STARTING AND OPERATING

graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop flash-

ing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extin-

guish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been re-

ceived. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to

20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this

information.

Check TPMS Message

The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on

and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a

system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound

a chime. The EVIC will display a "CHECK TPM SYS-

TEM" message for three seconds. This text message is

then followed by a graphic display, with "- -" in place of

the pressure value(s) indicating which Tire Pressure

Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.

Check TPM System Display

STARTING AND OPERATING 305

If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,

providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault

no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light will no longer flash, the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙

text message will not be present, and a pressure value

will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can

occur with any of the following scenarios:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to

facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM

sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting

that affects radio wave signals.

3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.

5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare

wheel and tire assembly.

1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure

monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor

the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road

tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning

limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will

sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

will still turn ON due to the low tire.

3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-

utes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the Tire Pressure Moni-

toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds

and then remain on solid.

306 STARTING AND OPERATING

4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will

sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on

solid.

5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and

reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare

tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long

as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning

limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may

need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph

(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this

information.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and

RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

following conditions:

•

This device may not cause harmful interference.

•

This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired

operation.

The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the

following licenses:

United States ..................... KR5S120123

Canada ........................ 2671-S120123

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis-

sion regulations and provide excellent fuel

economy when using high-quality regular

unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of

87. The use of premium gasoline is not

recommended. The use of premium gaso-

line will provide no benefit over high-quality regular

gasolines and, in some circumstances may result in

poorer performance.

STARTING AND OPERATING 307

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to

your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high

speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard

starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these

symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the ap-

propriate octane rating for your engine) before consider-

ing service for the vehicle.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner

burning gasoline referred to as "reformulated gasoline".

"Reformulated gasolines" contain oxygenates and are

specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and

improve air quality.

The manufacturer supports the use of "reformulated

gasolines". Properly blended "reformulated gasolines"

will provide excellent performance and durability of

engine and fuel system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-

genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-

ates are required in some areas of the country during the

winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.

Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in

your vehicle.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85

Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting

and drivability problems and may damage critical

fuel system components.

Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline

blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.

While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it

does not have the negative effects of Methanol.

308 STARTING AND OPERATING

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-

ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol

content may void the vehicle's warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85

fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

•

operate in a lean mode

•

OBD II "Malfunction Indicator Light" on

•

poor engine performance

•

poor cold start and cold drivability

•

increased risk for fuel system component corrosion

To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with

E-85 perform the following:

•

drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)

•

change the engine oil and oil filter

•

disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the

engine controller memory

More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged

exposure to E-85 fuel.

MMT In Gasoline

MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is

blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num-

ber. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance

advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number

without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have been

shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission

system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer

recommends using gasolines without MMT. Since the

MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the

pump, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or

not their gasoline contains MMT.

STARTING AND OPERATING 309

It is even more important to look for gasolines without

MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels

higher than those allowed in the United States.

MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-

lated gasolines.

Materials Added To Fuel

All gasoline sold in the United States is required to

contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional

detergents or other additives is not needed under normal

conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore

you should not have to add anything to the fuel.

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle's

performance:

•

The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.

Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance

and damage the emission control system.

•

An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition

malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to

overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or

some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or

malfunctioning and may require immediate service.

Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.

•

The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as

octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these

products contain high concentrations of Methanol.

Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems

resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not

the responsibility of the manufacturer.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems can result in civil penalties being assessed

against you.

310 STARTING AND OPERATING

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.

Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon

monoxide poisoning:

•

Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon

monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.

Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a

garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running for an extended period of time. If the

vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine

running for more than a short period, adjust the

ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the

vehicle.

•

Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-

nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time

the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions

repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side

windows fully open.

•

Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to

prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-

haust gases from entering the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 311

ADDING FUEL

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left side

of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure

the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.

After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable

over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the

gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle's

surface.

CAUTION!

•

A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.

•

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not "top

off" the fuel tank after filling.

Fuel Filler Door

312 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the

fuel tank is full.

WARNING!

•

Never have any smoking materials lit in or near

the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the

tank filled.

•

Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is

in violation of most state and Federal fire regula-

tions and will cause the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) to turn on.

NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you

hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly

tightened.

If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will come

on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle

is refueled.

WARNING!

A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a

portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You

could be burned. Always place gas containers on the

ground while filling.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel

filler cap is loose or improperly installed, a "gASCAP"

message will be displayed in the Odometer/Trip Odom-

eter in the instrument cluster. Refer to "Instrument

Cluster Description" in Section 4 of this manual. Tighten

the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer/trip

odometer RESET button to turn the message off. If the

problem continues, the message will appear the next time

the vehicle is started. Refer to "Onboard Diagnostic

System — OBD II" in Section 7 of this manual for more

information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 313

CAUTION!

Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys-

tem could result from using an improper fuel tank

filler cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let

impurities into the fuel system.

VEHICLE LOADING

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-

istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label

affixed to the driver's side door or B-Pillar.

Vehicle Certification Label

Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to

the driver's door B-Pillar.

The label contains the following information:

•

Name of manufacturer

•

Month and year of manufacture

•

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

•

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

•

Type of Vehicle

•

Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)

The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.

This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total

load must be limited so that you do not exceed the

GVWR.

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents

the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires

must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

314 STARTING AND OPERATING

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size

listed.

Inflation Pressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle, for

all loading conditions.

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight

of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full

capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo

loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight

values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a

commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are

added.

Overloading

The load carrying components (springs, tires, wheels,

etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as

long as you do not exceed the GVWR.

The best way to figure out the total weight of your

vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for

operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that

it is not over the GVWR.

Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and

shorten useful service life. Heavier suspension compo-

nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.

To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty

weight. Store heavier items down low and be sure you

distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all

loose items securely before driving. Improper weight

distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your

vehicle steers and handles, and the way the brakes

operate.

STARTING AND OPERATING 315

CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the

GVWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or

it can change the way your vehicle handles. This

could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can

shorten the life of your vehicle.

TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information

on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do

with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully

review this information to tow your load as efficiently

and safely as possible.

To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements

and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-

hicles used for trailer towing.

Common Towing Definitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist

you in understanding the information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.

This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue

weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not

exceed the GVWR.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all

cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-

porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙ loaded and

ready for operation⬙condition. The recommended way to

measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a

vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be

supported by the scale.

316 STARTING AND OPERATING

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)

The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle

and trailer when weighed in combination.

NOTE: The GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs (68 kg)

allowance for the presence of a driver.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear

axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles

evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or

rear GAWR.

WARNING!

It is important that you do not exceed the maximum

front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition

can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose

control of the vehicle and have an accident.

Tongue Weight (TW)

The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the

hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less

than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must

consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.

Frontal Area

The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum

width of the front of a trailer.

Trailer Sway Control

The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be

installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue

that typically provides adjustable friction associated with

the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer

swaying motions while traveling.

STARTING AND OPERATING 317

Weight-Carrying Hitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue

weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or

some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of

hitches are the most popular on the market today and

they're commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized

trailers.

Weight-Distributing Hitch

A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-

age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used

for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to

the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When

used in accordance with the manufacturers' directions, it

provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent

steering and brake control, thereby enhancing towing

safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control

also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and

contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.

Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load

equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue

Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle

and Trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.

Trailer Hitch Classification

Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of

trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional

Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer for

package content.

The following chart provides the industry standard for

the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can

tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the

correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer

Weight Ratings) chart for the maximum GTW towable for

your given drivetrain.

318 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Hitch Classification

Class Max. GTW

(Gross Trailer Wt.)

Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)

Refer to the "Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum

Trailer Weight Ratings)" chart for the Maximum

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given

drivetrain.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on

your vehicle.

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.

Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note

2.0L Auto/Man 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (450 kg) 150 lbs (50 kg)

2.4L Auto/Man 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (450 kg) 150 lbs (50 kg)

2.4L Auto/Man with

Trailer Tow Prep Pack-

age (AHC)

32 sq ft (3.0 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg)

Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

STARTING AND OPERATING 319

Note 1 – The trailer tongue weight must be considered as

part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and

should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire

and Loading Information placard. Refer to "Tire–Safety

Information" in this section.

Trailer and Tongue Weight

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in

the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your

vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the

rear can cause the trailer to sway severely from side-to-

side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and

trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause

of many trailer accidents.

Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight

stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.

Consider the following items when computing the

weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

•

The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.

•

The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment

put in or on your vehicle.

•

The weight of the driver and all passengers.

320 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the

trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional

factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed

options, must be considered as part of the total load on

your vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information

placard in the Tire Safety Information section of this

manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants

and cargo for your vehicle.

Towing Requirements

To promote proper break-in of your vehicle drivetrain

components, the following guidelines are recommended:

CAUTION!

•

Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles

(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may dam-

age your vehicle.

•

During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer

towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).

Perform the maintenance listed in the "Maintenance

Schedule." Refer to Section 8 of this manual. When

towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR,

ratings.

WARNING!

Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.

Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing

as safe as possible:

Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer

and will not shift during travel. When trailering

cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts

can occur that may be difficult for the driver to

control. You could lose control of your vehicle and

have an accident.

STARTING AND OPERATING 321

•

When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-

load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a

loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,

axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-

sis structure or tires.

•

Safety chains must always be used between your

vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the

frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the

chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough

slack for turning corners.

•

Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.

When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow

vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in

PARK. Always block or ⬙ chock⬙ the trailer wheels.

•

GCWR must not be exceeded.

•

Total weight must be distributed between the tow

vehicle and the trailer such that the following four

ratings are not exceeded:

1. GVWR

2. GTW

3. GAWR

4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized

(This requirement may limit the ability to always

achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a

percentage of total trailer weight).

322 STARTING AND OPERATING

Towing Requirements — Tires

−

Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact

spare tire.

−

Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe

and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to

"Tires – General Information" in this section for proper

tire inflation procedures.

−

Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation

pressures before trailer usage.

−

Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before

towing a trailer. Refer to "Tires–General Information" in

this section for the proper inspection procedure.

−

When replacing tires, refer to "Tires–General Informa-

tion" in this section for proper tire replacement proce-

dures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying

capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and

GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

−

Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or

vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.

This could cause inadequate braking and possible

personal injury.

−

An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is

required when towing a trailer with electronically

actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with

a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic

brake controller is not required.

−

Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over

1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of

2,000 lbs (907 kg).

STARTING AND OPERATING 323

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)

loaded, it should have its own brakes and they

should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this

could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher

brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

WARNING!

Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hy-

draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-

tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes

when you need them and could have an accident.

Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-

tance. When towing you should allow for additional

space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front

of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights and Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,

stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for

motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4- and 7-pin

wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness

and connector.

NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles

wiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle

but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.

Refer to the following illustrations.

324 STARTING AND OPERATING

4-Pin Connector

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park

2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn

3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn

7-Pin Connector

1 — Battery 5 — Ground

2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn

3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps

4 — Electric Brakes

STARTING AND OPERATING 325

Towing Tips

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping

and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy

traffic.

Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission

The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be

changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than

45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to the "Main-

tenance Schedule" in Section 8 for transmission fluid

change intervals.

NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level

before towing.

Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If

Equipped)

−

Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

−

When using the speed control, if you experience speed

drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until

you can get back to cruising speed.

−

Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to

maximize fuel efficiency.

Towing Tips — Cooling System

To reduce the potential for engine and transmission

overheating, take the following actions:

−

City Driving

When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission

in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed.

−

Highway Driving

Reduce speed.

−

Air Conditioning

Turn off temporarily.

326 STARTING AND OPERATING

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat

Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)

Recreational

Towing

Condition

Manual

Transaxle

Vehicles

Automatic

Transaxle

Vehicles

Four Wheel Flat

Tow (All Wheels

on Ground)

Yes Never

Two Wheel

Dolly Tow (Front

or Rear Wheels

on Ground)

Never Never

Flat Bed Tow

(All Wheels on

Bed of Truck)

Yes Yes

NOTE: Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may

be recreationally towed (flat towed) at any legal highway

speed, for any distance, if the manual transaxle is in

NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in the ACC position.

CAUTION!

•

DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a

automatic transaxle. Damage to the drivetrain will

result. If these vehicles require towing, make sure

all four wheels are off the ground.

•

Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.

Internal damage to the transaxle will occur if a

front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational

towing.

STARTING AND OPERATING 327

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

䡵Hazard Warning Flasher ................. 330

䡵If Your Engine Overheats ................ 330

䡵Automatic Transaxle Overheating .......... 332

䡵Jacking And Tire Changing ............... 332

▫Jack Location ....................... 333

▫Spare Tire Stowage ................... 333

▫Preparations For Jacking ................ 333

▫Jacking Instructions ................... 334

䡵Jump-Starting Procedures ................ 338

䡵Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................. 340

䡵Towing A Disabled Vehicle ............... 341

▫With Ignition Key .................... 341

▫Without The Ignition Key ............... 342

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the

instrument panel, below the radio.

Press the switch to turn on the Hazard

Warning flashers. When the Hazard

Warning flasher switch is activated, all

directional turn signals will flash on

and off to warn oncoming traffic of an

emergency. Press the switch a second

time to turn off flashers.

Do not use this emergency warning system when the

vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled

and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the

Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the

ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.

NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher

may wear down your battery.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the

potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-

tion.

•

On the highways — Slow down.

•

In city traffic — While stopped, put the transmission in

NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.

If the pointer rises to the H(red) mark, the instrument

cluster will sound a chime. When safe, pull over and stop

the vehicle with the engine at idle. Turn off the air

conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into

the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red)

mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off imme-

diately and call for service.

330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down

an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner

is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to

the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C

removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature

control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and

the fan control to high. This allows the heater core to act

as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat

from the engine cooling system.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage

your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads "H",

pull over when safe and stop the vehicle with the

engine at idle. Turn the air conditioner off and wait

until the pointer drops back into the normal range.

After appropriate action has been taken, if the

pointer remains on the "H", turn the engine OFF

immediately and call for service.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or

others could be badly burned by steam or boiling

coolant. You may want to call a service center if your

vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the

hood yourself, refer to "Maintenance", Section 7 of

this manual. Follow the warnings under the "Cooling

System Pressure Cap" paragraph.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OVERHEATING

During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up

long grades on hot days, the automatic transaxle oil may

become too hot.

If this happens, the transmission overheat in-

dicator light will come on, and the vehicle will

slow slightly until the automatic transaxle

cools down enough to allow a return to the

requested speed. If the high speed is maintained, the

overheating will reoccur, as before, in a cyclic fashion.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!

•

Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The

vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You

could be crushed. Never put any part of your body

under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run

the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you

need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a

service center where it can be raised on a lift.

•

The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing

tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the

vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should

be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or

slippery areas.

332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Jack Location

The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor

in the cargo area.

Spare Tire Stowage

The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor

in the cargo area.

Spare Tire Removal

Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.

Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or

slippery areas.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off

the road to avoid the danger of being hit when

operating the jack or changing the wheel.

2. Set the parking brake.

3. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transaxle) or

REVERSE (manual transaxle).

4. Turn OFF the ignition.

Spare Tire and Jack Stowage

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333

5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

6. Block both the front and rear of the

wheel diagonally opposite the jacking

position. For example, if changing the

right front tire, block the left rear

wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle

while the vehicle is being jacked.

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to

help prevent personal injury or damage to your

vehicle:

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Always park on a firm, level surface as far from

the edge of the roadway as possible before raising

the vehicle.

•

Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to

be raised.

•

Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic

transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in

REVERSE.

•

Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a

jack.

•

Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a

jack.

•

Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.

•

Only use the jack in the positions indicated and

for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.

(Continued)

334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING! (Continued)

•

If working on or near a roadway, be extremely

careful of motor traffic.

•

To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are

securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the

valve stem facing the ground.

•

Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the

spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left

to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from

the jack assembly.

2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning

them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the

ground.

Jack Warning Label Jacking Locations

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on

locations other than those indicated in Step 3.

3. There are two front jacking locations and two rear

jacking locations on each side of the body. The front

locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts, the rear

ones by two rectangular cutouts. For vehicles equipped

with plastic trim, the plastic has been cut away to expose

the jacking locations in the body.

Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is

securely engaged.

4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be

placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is

positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack

head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the

wheel to be changed.

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make

the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and

hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough

to remove the tire.

5. Using the swivel wrench raise the vehicle by turning

the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until the

tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is

obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift

provides maximum stability.

6. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel

covers, where applicable, off the hub. Install the spare

wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the

nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid

the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten

the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.

336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel

covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp

edges.

NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the

wheel nuts. When reinstalling the original wheel, prop-

erly align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the

wheel cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel nuts.

7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.

8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench

while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts until each

nut has been tightened twice. Correct wheel nut torque is

100 ft lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have tightened

the nuts correctly, have them checked with a torque

wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.

9. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is

free. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and

stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using

the means provided.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or

hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-

hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in

the places provided.

10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the

tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337

WARNING!

A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard

stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have

the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-

ately.

11. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct

the tire pressure as required.

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES

WARNING!

•

Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-

ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the

ignition switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get

it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic

transaxle cannot be started this way and may be

damaged. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic

converter and once the engine has started, ignite

and damage the converter and vehicle. If the

vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables

may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.

This type of start can be dangerous if done im-

properly, so follow this procedure carefully.

•

Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry

such as watch bands or bracelets that might make

an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be

seriously injured.

NOTE: Disconnecting the battery with the ignition in

the ON position will cause vehicles with an automatic

338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

transaxle (CVT2) to go into "default mode" and turn on

the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). See your autho-

rized dealer to correct this condition.

1. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park

that vehicle within booster cable reach but without

letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake, place the

automatic transmission in PARK (the manual transmis-

sion in NEUTRAL) and turn the ignition to OFF for both

vehicles.

2. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical

loads.

3. Using the two finger screws on the cover, remove the

air intake duct covering the battery.

4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive

terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of

the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the dis-

charged battery.

WARNING!

•

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not

allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or cloth-

ing. Don't lean over the battery when attaching the

clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If

acid splashes in your eyes or on your skin, flush

the contaminated area immediately with large

quantities of water.

•

A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-

mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away

from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery

or any other booster source with an output that

exceeds 12-Volts.

5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal

of the booster battery and then to the negative terminal of

the discharged battery. Make sure you have a good

contact.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339

6. If the vehicle is equipped with a Sentry Key威Immo-

bilizer, turn the ignition switch to the ON position for

three seconds before moving the ignition switch to the

START position.

7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster

battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the

engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the se-

quence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con-

trol or ESP, turn the system OFF before attempting to

"rock" the vehicle.

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it

can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your

steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the

front wheels. Then shift back and forth between RE-

VERSE and 1st gear. Usually the least accelerator pedal

pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin-

ning the wheels is most effective.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause axle, tire

damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure

someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster

than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds

continuously without stopping when you are stuck.

And don't let anyone near a spinning wheel, no

matter what the speed.

340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast

may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can

also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above

30 mph (48 km/h). Do not spin the wheels continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

With Ignition Key

Automatic Transaxle

•

Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles can be towed with

the front wheels elevated or on a flatbed truck (all four

wheels off the ground).

•

All Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles must be towed on a

flatbed truck (all four wheels off the ground).

CAUTION!

DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an

automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain

will result.

Manual Transaxle

•

Front Wheel Drive (FWD) or All Wheel Drive (AWD)

vehicles can be flat towed (all four wheels on the

ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL.

•

FWD vehicles can be towed with the front or rear

wheels elevated.

•

FWD or AWD vehicles can be towed on a flatbed truck

(all wheels off the ground).

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341

All Transaxles

If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed

(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON

position, not the ACC position. Make certain the trans-

mission remains in NEUTRAL.

CAUTION!

•

If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the

ignition switch must be in the ACC position, not

in the LOCK position.

•

Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when

towing. When securing the vehicle to a flat bed

truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension

components. Damage to your vehicle may result

from improper towing.

Without The Ignition Key

Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed

with the ignition in the LOCK position. A dolly should be

used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised.

Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam-

age to the vehicle.

Battery power is required to release the brake/

transmission interlock system. There is a removable plug

in the right side of the shift lever housing that allows you

to insert your finger to override the system. The ignition

key must be in the ON position to use the override lever.

342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

䡵Engine Compartment — 2.0L/2.4L .......... 345

䡵Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II ....... 346

▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 346

䡵Emissions Inspection And Maintenance

Programs ............................ 347

䡵Replacement Parts ..................... 348

䡵Dealer Service ........................ 349

䡵Maintenance Procedures ................. 349

▫Engine Oil ......................... 349

▫Engine Oil Filter ..................... 352

▫Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............... 352

▫Maintenance-Free Battery ............... 353

▫Air Conditioner Maintenance ............ 354

▫Body Lubrication ..................... 355

▫Windshield Wiper Blades ............... 355

▫Adding Washer Fluid .................. 356

▫Exhaust System ...................... 356

▫Cooling System ...................... 358

▫Brake System ....................... 364

▫Automatic Transaxle (CVT) .............. 366

▫Manual Transaxle .................... 366

▫Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) – AWD/4WD

Models Only ........................ 367

▫Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD/4WD

Models Only ........................ 368

▫Appearance Care And Protection From

Corrosion .......................... 368

䡵Fuses .............................. 374

▫Integrated Power Module (IPM) .......... 374

䡵Vehicle Storage ....................... 377

䡵Replacement Bulbs ..................... 377

䡵Bulb Replacement ..................... 378

▫Headlamps ......................... 378

▫Fog Lights ......................... 380

▫Tail Lights, Rear Turn Signals And Backup

Lights — Replacement ................. 381

▫License Lights ....................... 382

▫Center High-Mounted Stoplight .......... 384

▫Off-Road Light ...................... 384

䡵Fluids And Capacities ................... 386

䡵Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts ....... 387

▫Engine ............................ 387

▫Chassis ............................ 388

344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L/2.4L

1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 — Battery

2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 — Air Cleaner Filter

3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap

4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick

5 — Integrated Power Module 10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard

Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors

the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic

transaxle control systems. When these systems are oper-

ating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent per-

formance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions

well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system

will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will

also store diagnostic codes and other information to

assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-

though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not

need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as

soon as possible.

CAUTION!

•

Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause

further damage to the emission control system. It

could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The

vehicle must be serviced before any emissions

tests can be performed.

•

If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,

severe catalytic converter damage and power loss

will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can

determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or

improperly installed. A "gASCAP" message will be dis-

played in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until

a⬙ clicking ⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the

gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer

RESET button to turn off the message. If the problem

346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

persists, the message will appear the next time the

vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If

the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will

turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL

light off.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass

an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system.

Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-

nance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on

when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system

is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II

system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently

serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-

ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not

ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,

which you can use prior to going to the test station. To

check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must

do the following:

1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.

2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank

or start the engine.

3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start

this test over.

4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you

will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb

check.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347

5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will

happen:

a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then

return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF

the ignition or start the engine. This means that your

vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should

not proceed to the I/M station.

b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully

illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the

engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system

is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your

authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was

recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,

you may need to do nothing more than drive your

vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II

system to update. A recheck with the above test routine

may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is

ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal

vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced

before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail

your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine

running.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine MOPAR威parts for normal/scheduled

maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-

sure the designed performance. Damage or failures

caused by the use of non-MOPAR威parts for maintenance

and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer's

warranty.

348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

DEALER SERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-

nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service

operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are

available which include detailed service information for

your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting

any procedure yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems can result in civil penalties being assessed

against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you

have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If

you have any doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-

chanic.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance

services determined by the engineers who designed your

vehicle.

Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed

maintenance intervals, there are other items that should

operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.

However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it

could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.

These items should be inspected if a malfunction is

observed or suspected.

Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level

To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must

be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at

regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349

The best time to check the engine oil level is about five

minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not

check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat

overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is

cold will give you an incorrect reading.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and

only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of

the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the

range markings on the dipstick. The range markings will

consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a cross-

hatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and

MAX at the high end of the range. Adding 1 qt (1L) of oil

when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range

will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator

range.

CAUTION!

Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine as

indicated by the range markings, as described above,

on the engine oil dipstick will cause oil aeration,

which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase

in oil temperature. This could damage your engine.

Change Engine Oil

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" in Section 8 for

recommended engine oil change intervals.

Engine Oil Selection

For best performance and maximum protection for all

engines under all types of operating conditions, the

manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer-

tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material

Standard MS-6395.

350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil

Identification Symbol

This symbol means that the oil has

been certified by the American

Petroleum Institute (API). The

manufacturer only recommends

API Certified engine oils.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)

SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating

temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature

starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler

cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity

grade for your engine.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-

fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-

ber should not be used.

Synthetic Engine Oils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-

mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-

mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes

are followed.

Materials Added To Engine Oils

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-

dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to

the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its

performance may be impaired by supplemental

additives.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351

Disposing Of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and

oil filtersfrom your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,

indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the

environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service

station, or governmental agency for advice on how and

where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in

your area.

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine

oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

All of this manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type

disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-

ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consider-

ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure

most efficient service. MOPAR威engine oil filters are high

quality oil filters and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" in Section 8 for the

proper maintenance interval.

WARNING!

The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection

in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air

cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or

maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the

engine compartment before starting the vehicle with

the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in

serious personal injury.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters

varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be

used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威engine air

cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are

recommended.

352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Maintenance-Free Battery

The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently

sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic

maintenance required.

WARNING!

•

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can

burn or even blind you. Don't allow battery fluid

to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Don't lean

over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid

splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-

diately with large amounts of water.

•

Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep

flame or sparks away from the battery. Don't use a

booster battery or any other booster source with an

output greater than 12 Volts. Don't allow cable

clamps to touch each other.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

•

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands

after handling.

•

The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that

should not be disconnected and should only be

replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).

CAUTION!

•

It is essential when replacing the cables on the

battery that the positive cable is attached to the

positive post and the negative cable is attached to

the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-

tive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the

battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the

terminal posts and free of corrosion.

(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353

CAUTION! (Continued)

•

If a "fast charger" is used while the battery is in

the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables

before connecting the charger to the battery. Do

not use a "fast charger" to provide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner

should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer

at the start of each warm season. This service should

include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance

test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this

time.

WARNING!

•

Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants

approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-

tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are

flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other

unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause

the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to

Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for

further warranty information.

•

The air conditioning system contains refrigerant

under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal

injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant

or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected

should be done by an experienced repairman.

354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling

R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-

carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental

Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-

ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning

service be performed by authorized dealers or other

service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system

sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor

oil, or refrigerants.

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as

seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,

tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-

cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as

MOPAR威 Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy opera-

tion and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the

application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should

be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating

excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular

attention should also be given to hood latching compo-

nents to insure proper function. When performing other

underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism

and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a

year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small

amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR威

Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the

windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a

mild, nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This

will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road film

and help reduce streaking and smearing.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods

may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use

washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt

from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to

remove frost or ice from the windshield. Make sure that

they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to

avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of

contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,

gasoline, etc.

Adding Washer Fluid

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine

compartment, and the fluid level should be checked at

regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield

washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer solvents

are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care

must be exercised when filling or working around

the washer solution.

Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into

the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust

system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system,

or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or

when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,

have a competent technician inspect the complete ex-

haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-

aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams

or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep

into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the

356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil

change or lubrication. Replace as required.

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon

monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can

eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer

to "Exhaust Gas" in the Safety Tips section of this

manual.

The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel

only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the

catalyst as an emission control device.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-

verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-

portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure

proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst

damage.

CAUTION!

Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your

vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In

the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-

ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-

mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-

ued operation of your vehicle with a severe

malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,

resulting in possible damage to the converter and the

vehicle.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357

WARNING!

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over

materials that can burn. Such materials might be

grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust

system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas

where your exhaust system can contact anything that

can burn.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning

engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe

and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop

the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.

Service, including a tune up to manufacturers specifica-

tions, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:

•

Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition

when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in

motion.

•

Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the

vehicle.

•

Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires

disconnected for a prolonged period.

Cooling System

WARNING!

•

When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-

connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition

switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature

controlled and can start at any time the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

(Continued)

358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

•

You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant

or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear

steam coming from under the hood, do not open

the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.

Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap

when the radiator is hot.

Coolant Checks

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every

12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where

applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or

rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,

flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-

freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any

accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently

spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the

face of the condenser.

Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-

ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection

at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for

leaks.

Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" in Section 8 for

proper maintenance intervals.

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a

considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a

reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough

rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly

dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).

Selection Of Coolant

Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this

section for the correct fluid type.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359

CAUTION!

•

Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than

specified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology

(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in

engine damage and may decrease corrosion pro-

tection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze)

is introduced into the cooling system in an emer-

gency, it should be replaced with the specified

engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.

•

Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-

tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they

may not be compatible with the radiator engine

coolant and may plug the radiator.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

•

This vehicle has not been designed for use with

Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (anti-

freeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine

coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

Adding Coolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine

coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance

intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up

to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before

replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-

nance period, it is important that you use the same

engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your

vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using

Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine

coolant (antifreeze).

360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

When adding engine coolant (antifreeze), a minimum

solution of 50% recommended MOPAR威 Antifreeze/

Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid

Organic Additive Technology), or equivalent, in water

should be used. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed

70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are antici-

pated.

Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized

water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze)

solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the

amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling

system.

Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to main-

tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-

cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where

the vehicle is operated.

NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will

decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and

will require more frequent coolant changes.

Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine

coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant

(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant

recovery bottle.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any

accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361

WARNING!

•

The warning words "DO NOT OPEN HOT" on the

cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.

Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the

engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the

cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes

pressure to build up in the cooling system. To

prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pres-

sure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.

•

Do not use a pressure cap other than the one

specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine

damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is

a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check

with your local authorities to determine the disposal

rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-

mals or children do not store ethylene glycol-based

engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it

to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a

child, contact a physician immediately. Clean up any

ground spills immediately.

Coolant Level

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for

determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the

engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera-

ture, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the

bottle should be between the "ADD" and "FULL" lines

shown on the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is

no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for

the coolant freeze point or replacing the engine coolant

(antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As

long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,

the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.

362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to

maintain the proper level, it should be added to the

coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

Points to Remember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/

kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming

from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-

mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high

humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-

ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no

evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be

safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

•

Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.

•

Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the

coolant recovery bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)

needs to be added, the contents of the coolant recovery

bottle must also be protected against freezing.

•

If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are

required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle

does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling

system should be pressure tested for leaks.

•

Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at

50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)

and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of

your engine which contains aluminum components.

•

Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery

bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

•

Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is

equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the

condenser clean also.

•

Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter

operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363

ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may

result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)

performance, poor gas mileage, and increased

emissions.

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake

system components should be inspected periodically.

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" in Section 8 for

proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and

possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting

or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally

high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and

possible brake damage. You would not have your full

braking capacity in an emergency.

Brake Master Cylinder

The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked

when performing under hood services, or immediately if

the brake system warning light is on.

Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before

removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the

fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake

fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the

brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked

when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level

may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual

transaxle , the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both

the brake system and the clutch release system. The two

systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one

system will not affect the other system. The manual

transaxle clutch release system should not require fluid

replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the brake

364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does not

indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a result of

a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See your

local authorized dealer for service.

Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Re-

fer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this

section for the correct fluid type.

WARNING!

•

Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial

boiling point or is unidentified as to specification,

may result in sudden brake failure during hard

prolonged braking. You could have an accident.

•

Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in

spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the

brake fluid catching fire.

CAUTION!

Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall

clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids

may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of

clutch function and the ability to shift the transaxle.

Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed

container to avoid contamination from foreign matter.

NOTE: Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contami-

nate the brake fluid as seal damage will result!

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365

Automatic Transaxle (CVT)

Selection Of Lubricant

It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the

transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance. Use

only the manufacturer's recommended transmission

fluid which has been formulated with special metal to

metal friction coefficient additives to provide the proper

steel belt traction on the drive and driven pulleys. Refer

to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section

for the correct fluid type.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-

turer's recommended fluid will cause belt slip and

result in a complete transmission failure! Refer to

"Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this sec-

tion for the correct fluid type.

Fluid Level Check

The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be

checked only by a trained technician.

Fluid And Filter Changes

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" in Section 8 for the

correct maintenance interval.

Special Additives

Do not add any materials (other than leak detection dyes)

to Continuously Variable Transaxle (CVT) Fluid

(CVTF+4). CVTF+4 is an engineered product and its

performance may be impaired by supplemental

additives.

Manual Transaxle

Lubricant Selection

Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission

fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in

this section for the correct fluid type.

366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Fluid Level Check

Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid

level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a

point not more that 3/16 in (4.7 mm) below the bottom of

the hole.

Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.

Frequency Of Fluid Change

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at

the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of

the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri-

cant has become contaminated with water.

NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be

changed immediately.

Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) – AWD/4WD Models

Only

Lubricant Selection

Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer

to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section

for the correct fluid type.

Fluid Level Check

Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If

leakage is detected, check the fluid level by removing the

fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between

the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 in (4 mm) below the fill

hole.

Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.

Frequency Of Fluid Change

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" in Section 8 for the

correct maintenance interval.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367

Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD/4WD Models

Only

Lubricant Selection

Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer

to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section

for the correct fluid type.

Fluid Level Check

Visually inspected the unit at each oil change for leakage.

If leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing

the fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained be-

tween the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 in (4 mm) below

the fill hole.

Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.

Frequency Of Fluid Change

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" in Section 8 for the

correct maintenance interval.

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion

Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-

graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads

passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on

trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly

corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,

which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,

road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme

hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will

have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-

body protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable

you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion

resistance built into your vehicle.

What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of

paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

The most common causes of corrosion are:

•

Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

•

Stone and gravel impact.

•

Insects, tree sap and tar.

•

Salt in the air near sea coast localities.

•

Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

Washing

•

Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-

hicle in the shade using MOPAR威Car Wash or a mild

car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with

clear water.

•

If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-

lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威Super Kleen Bug

and Tar Remover to remove.

•

Use MOPAR威Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains

and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to

scratch the paint.

•

Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing

that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint

finish.

CAUTION!

Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such

as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch

metal and painted surfaces.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369

Special Care

•

If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive

near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once

a month.

•

It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges

of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and

open.

•

If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,

touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is

considered the responsibility of the owner.

•

If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or

similar cause which destroys the paint and protective

coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-

sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-

sibility of the owner.

•

If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,

de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well

packaged and sealed.

•

If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider

mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

•

Use MOPAR威Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as

possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to

match the color of your vehicle.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and

chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with

a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove

heavy soil, use MOPAR威Wheel Cleaner or select a

nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring

pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only

MOPAR威 cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven

cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic

solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels'

protective finish.

370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

YES Essentials威Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If

Equipped

YES Essentials威seats may be cleaned in the following

manner:

•

Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting

with a clean, dry towel.

•

Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

•

For tough stains, apply MOPAR威Total Clean or a mild

soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.

Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

•

For grease stains, apply MOPAR威Multi-Purpose

Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain.

Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

•

Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen-

tials威products.

Interior Care

Use MOPAR威Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and

carpeting.

Use MOPAR威Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

MOPAR威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for

leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular

cleaning with a damp, soft cloth. Small particles of dirt

can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery

and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.

Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth

and MOPAR威Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid

soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please

do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-

gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather

upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not

required to maintain the original condition.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.

Many are potentially flammable, and if used in

closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm.

Cleaning Headlights

Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and

less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and, therefore,

different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and

reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To

remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-

lowed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel

wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis

with MOPAR威Glass Cleaner or any commercial

household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type

cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-

dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear

quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do

not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may

scratch the elements. When cleaning the rearview mirror,

spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do

not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

Instrument Panel Cover

The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which

minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use

protectants or other products which may cause undesir-

able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the

low glare surface.

372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Instrument Panel Bezels

CAUTION!

When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve-

hicle, read the installation instructions carefully.

Some air fresheners will damage the finish of

painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly

contact any surface.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are

molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care

must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap solution may

be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive

cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean, damp

rag.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the seat belts with chemical

solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.

Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or

lukewarm water. Do not remove the seat belts from the

car to wash them.

Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if

the buckles do not work properly.

Dry with a soft cloth.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373

FUSES

Integrated Power Module (IPM)

The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the

engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This

center contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A label

that identifies each component may be printed on the

inside of the cover. Refer to "Engine Compartment" in

this section of the Owner's Manual for the underhood

location of the IPM.

Cavity Cartridge

Fuse Mini-

Fuse Description

1 Empty Empty

2 15 Amp

Lt Blue AWD/4WD ECU

Feed

3 10 Amp

Red CHMSL Brake Switch

Feed

4 10 Amp

Red Ignition Switch Feed/

OCM

Cavity Cartridge

Fuse Mini-

Fuse Description

5 20 Amp

Yellow Trailer Tow

6 10 Amp

Red IOD Sw/Pwr Mir/

Steering Cntrl Sdar/

Hands-Free Phone

7 30 Amp

Green IOD Sense1

8 30 Amp

Green IOD Sense2

9 40 Amp

Green Power Seats

10 20 Amp

Yellow CCN Power Locks/

Interior Lighting

11 15 Amp

Lt Blue Power Outlet

12 20 Amp

Yellow Ign Run/Acc Inverter

374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge

Fuse Mini-

Fuse Description

13 20 Amp

Yellow Pwr Run/Acc Outlet

RR/Dome Lamp

14 10 Amp

Red IOD CCN

15 40 Amp

Green RAD Fan Relay Bat-

tery Feed

16 15 Amp

Lt Blue IGN Run/Acc Dome

Lamp/Sunroof/Rear

Wiper Motor/ACC

Inverter

17 10 Amp

Red IOD Feed Mod-Wcm

18 40 Amp

Green ASD Relay Contact

PWR Feed

19 20 Amp

Yellow PWR Amp 1 & Amp

2 Feed

Cavity Cartridge

Fuse Mini-

Fuse Description

20 15 Amp

Lt Blue IOD Feed Radio

21 10 Amp

Red IOD Feed Intrus

Mod/Siren (If

Equipped)

22 10 Amp

Red IGN RUN Heat/AC/

Compass Sensor

23 15 Amp

Lt Blue ENG ASD Relay Feed

24 15 Amp

Lt Blue Power Sunroof Feed

25 10 Amp

Red Heated Mirror (If

Equipped)

26 15 Amp

Lt Blue ENG ASD Relay Feed

27 10 Amp

Red IGN RUN Only ORC

Feed

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375

Cavity Cartridge

Fuse Mini-

Fuse Description

28 10 Amp

Red IGN RUN ORC/OCM

Feed

29 Hot Car (No Fuse Re-

quired)

30 20 Amp

Yellow Heated Seats

31 10 Amp

Red Headlamp Washer

Relay Control (If

Equipped)

32 30 Amp

Pink ENG ASD Control

Feed 1

33 10 Amp

Red ABS MOD/J1962

Conn/PCM

34 30 Amp

Pink ABS Valve Feed

35 40 Amp

Green ABS Pump Feed

Cavity Cartridge

Fuse Mini-

Fuse Description

36 30 Amp

Pink Headlamp/Washer

Control/Smart Glass

(If Equipped)

37 25 Amp

Natural Diesel Fuel Heater —

If Equipped

CAUTION!

•

When installing the IPM cover, it is important to

ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully

latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get

into the IPM, and possibly result in an electrical

system failure.

(Continued)

376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION! (Continued)

•

When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to

use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.

The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated

may result in a dangerous electrical system over-

load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it

indicates a problem in the circuit that must be

corrected.

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you will not be using your vehicle for more than

21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your

battery.

•

Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution

Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).

•

Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

REPLACEMENT BULBS

All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.

Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not

be used for replacement.

LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb Number

Front Header Lamp ...................... T578

Center Dome Lamp ...................... T578

Rear Cargo/Flashlight ................. 8–A35LF

LIGHTS BULBS — Exterior Bulb No.

Low Beam/High Beam Headlight ............H13

Front Park/Turn Signal/Side

Marker Light .................. 3157AK or 3157A

Front Fog Light ......................... 9145

Center High Mounted Stop Light

(CHMSL) ......................LED Assembly

Rear Tail/Turn/Stop ..................... 3157

Backup Light ..................... W16W (921)

License Light ..........................W5W

Off-Road Light...........................H3

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377

BULB REPLACEMENT

Headlamps

1. Raise the hood and locate the connector behind the

headlight.

2. Reach into the engine compartment and pull the red

lock out at the green connector.

378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Remove green connector from back of bulb by pulling

straight back. 4. Twist the bulb to the left.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379

5. Pull bulb outward from assembly.

NOTE: These are halogen bulbs. Take care not to touch

the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from your fingers

could cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb

life.

Fog Lights

1. Access lamp through the lower fascia cutout.

2. Rotate bulb and connector 1/4 turn counterclockwise.

3. Pull bulb off of connector.

380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Tail Lights, Rear Turn Signals And Backup Lights

— Replacement

1. Remove the two push-pins from the tail light housing.

2. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly to disengage the

lamp from the aperture panel.

3. Twist and remove socket from lamp.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381

4. Remove bulb from socket and replace.

License Lights

1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the

snap tab to remove the lamp from the liftgate.

382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise. 3. Pull bulb from socket.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383

Center High-Mounted Stoplight

Light is an LED assembly. See your authorized dealer for

replacement.

Off-Road Light

1. Remove the three screws attaching the lens to the

housing.

2. Unlatch the wire clasp securing the bulb into the

housing and rotate it into the position shown.

384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Disconnect the bulb from the lamp harness to replace

the bulb.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385

FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric

Fuel (Approximate) 13.6 Gallons 51.5 Liters

Engine Oil with Filter

2.0L and 2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 4.5 Quarts 4.26 Liters

Cooling System *

2.0L and 2.4L Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5

Year/100,000 Mile Formula) 7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant MOPAR威Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid

Organic Additive Technology)

Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of

Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for

correct SAE grade.

Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威Oil Filter (P/N 04884900AB) or equivalent

Spark Plugs ZFR5F-11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])

Fuel Selection 87 Octane

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387

Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Automatic Transaxle (CVT) MOPAR威CVTF + 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid

Manual Transaxle MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid

Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) MOPAR威 Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 80W-90 API GL 5 or equivalent non-

synthetic product.

Power Transfer Unit (PTU) MOPAR威Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 80W-90 API GL 5 or equivalent non-

synthetic product.

Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake

fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended

brake fluids or equivalent.

Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4 or ATF+4 Automatic Transmission

Fluid.

388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

䡵Emissions Control System Maintenance ...... 390

䡵Maintenance Schedule .................. 390

▫Required Maintenance Intervals .......... 392

EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type

must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure

the continued proper functioning of the emissions control

system. These and all other maintenance services in-

cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best

vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-

tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating

conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip

driving.

Inspection and service should also be done anytime a

malfunction is suspected.

NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis-

sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be

performed by any automotive repair establishment or

individual using any automotive part that has been

certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-

nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is

time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

equipped vehicles, "Oil Change Required" will be dis-

played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,

indicating that an oil change is necessary.

On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, "Change Oil" will flash

in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime

will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

Based on engine operation condition, the oil change

indicator message will illuminate; this means that service

is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced

as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

390 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

NOTE:

•

The oil change indicator message will not monitor the

time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle's

oil if it has been six months since your last oil change

and even if the oil change indicator message is NOT

illuminated.

•

Change your engine oil more often if you drive your

vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.

•

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals

exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, which-

ever comes first.

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator

message after completing the scheduled oil change. If this

scheduled oil change is performed by someone other

than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by

referring to the steps described under "Oil Change

Required" in "Use Factory Settings" of the EVIC section

in this manual or under "Odometer/Trip Odometer" in

the Instrument Cluster Descriptions section of this

manual.

At Each Stop for Fuel

•

Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a

fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level

while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the

accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when

the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.

•

Check the windshield washer solvent and add if

required.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 391

Once a Month

•

Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or

damage.

•

Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals

as required.

•

Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake

master cylinder, power steering and transmission and

add as needed.

•

Check all lights and other electrical items for correct

operation.

At Each Oil Change

•

Change the engine oil filter.

•

Inspect the brake hoses and lines.

•

Check the manual transmission fluid level.

CAUTION!

Failure to perform the required maintenance items

may result in damage to the vehicle.

Required Maintenance Intervals

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following

pages for the required maintenance intervals.

392 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or

6 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏Rotate tires.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏Rotate tires.

❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the

engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.

❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.

❏Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or

12 months.

❏Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or

12 months.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 393

18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or

18 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏Rotate tires.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏Rotate tires.

❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the

engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.

❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.

❏Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏Inspect the CV joints.

❏Inspect exhaust system.

❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

394 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or

30 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏Rotate tires.

❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.

❏Replace the spark plugs (except 2.4L

PZEV).

❏Adjust the parking brake on vehicles

equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or

36 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏Rotate tires.

❏If using your vehicle for any of the

following: Dusty or off-road conditions.

Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;

replace if necessary.

❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if

necessary.

❏Replace the air conditioning filter.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or

42 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏Rotate tires.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 395

48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏Rotate tires.

❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the

engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.

❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.

❏Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏Inspect the CV joints.

❏Inspect exhaust system.

❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.

❏Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer

towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),

off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot

weather, above 90°F (32°C).

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or

54 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏Rotate tires.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

396 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏Rotate tires.

❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.

❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.

❏Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.

❏Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏Replace the spark plugs (except 2.4L PZEV).

❏Replace rear drive assembly (RDA) fluid.

❏Replace power transfer unit (PTU) fluid.

❏Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the

following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.

❏Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles

(170 000 km).

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or

66 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏Rotate tires.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 397

72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏Rotate tires.

❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the

engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.

❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.

❏Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏Inspect the CV joints.

❏Inspect exhaust system.

❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or

78 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏Rotate tires.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

398 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or

84 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏Rotate tires.

❏If using your vehicle for any of the

following: Dusty or off-road conditions.

Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;

replace if necessary.

❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if

necessary.

❏Replace the air conditioning filter.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or

90 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏Rotate tires.

❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.

❏Replace the spark plugs (except 2.4L

PZEV).

❏Inspect and replace PCV valve if

necessary. †

❏Adjust the parking brake on vehicles

equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 399

96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏Rotate tires.

❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the

engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.

❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.

❏Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏Inspect the CV joints.

❏Inspect exhaust system.

❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.

❏Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer

towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),

off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot

weather, above 90°F (32°C).

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or

102 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏Rotate tires.

❏Flush and replace the engine coolant.

❏Replace the spark plugs (2.4L PZEV).

❏Flush and replace the engine coolant if

not done at 60 months.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

400 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or

108 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏Rotate tires.

❏If using your vehicle for any of the

following: Dusty or off-road conditions.

Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;

replace if necessary.

❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if

necessary.

❏Replace the air conditioning filter.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or

114 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏Rotate tires.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 401

120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏Rotate tires.

❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.

❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.

❏Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.

❏Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏Inspect the CV joints.

❏Inspect exhaust system.

❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.

❏Replace the spark plugs (except 2.4L PZEV).

❏Replace rear drive assembly (RDA) fluid.

❏Replace power transfer unit (PTU) fluid.

❏Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.

❏Replace the accessory drive belt(s).

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or

126 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏Rotate tires.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

402 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or

132 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏Rotate tires.

❏If using your vehicle for any of the

following: Dusty or off-road conditions.

Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;

replace if necessary.

❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if

necessary.

❏Replace the air conditioning filter.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or

138 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏Rotate tires.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 403

144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service

Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.

❏Rotate tires.

❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the

engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.

❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.

❏Replace the air conditioning filter.

❏Inspect the CV joints.

❏Inspect exhaust system.

❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.

❏Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer

towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),

off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot

weather, above 90°F (32°C).

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or

150 Months Maintenance

Service Schedule

❏Change the engine oil and engine oil

filter.

❏Rotate tires.

❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.

❏Replace the spark plugs (except 2.4L

PZEV).

❏Adjust the parking brake on vehicles

equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.

Odometer Reading Date

Repair Order # Dealer Code

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

404 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer

to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions

warranty.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which

you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If

you have any doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-

chanic.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 405

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

䡵Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your

Vehicle .............................. 409

▫Prepare For The Appointment ............ 409

▫Prepare A List ....................... 409

▫Be Reasonable With Requests ............ 409

䡵If You Need Assistance .................. 409

▫Chrysler LLC Customer Center ........... 410

▫Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 410

▫In Mexico Contact .................... 410

▫Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or

Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 411

▫Service Contract ..................... 411

䡵Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) .... 412

䡵MOPAR威 Parts ....................... 412

䡵Reporting Safety Defects ................. 412

▫In The 50 United States And Washington,

D.C. .............................. 412

▫In Canada .......................... 413

䡵Publication Order Forms ................. 413

䡵Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire

Quality Grades ........................ 414

▫Treadwear .......................... 415

▫Traction Grades ...................... 415

▫Temperature Grades ................... 416

408 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you're having warranty work done, be sure to have the

right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All

work to be performed may not be covered by the

warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service

manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's

service history. This can often provide a clue to the

current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the

specific work you want done. If you've had an accident

or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the

service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your

vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with

the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.

At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental

vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it

is advisable to make these arrangements when you call

for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally

interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy

with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.

We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an

authorized dealer. They know you and the vehicle best,

and are most concerned that you get prompt and high

quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers

have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special

tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is

fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 409

This is why you should always talk to an authorized

dealer's service manager first. Most matters can be re-

solved with this process.

•

If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the

general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-

ship. They want to know if you need assistance.

•

If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the

concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer

center.

Any communication to the manufacturer's customer cen-

ter should include the following information:

•

Owner's name and address

•

Owner's telephone number (home and office)

•

Authorized dealership name

•

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

•

Vehicle delivery date and mileage

Chrysler LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (800) 992-1997

Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: (800) 465–2001

In Mexico contact:

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

410 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the

manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-

cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer

center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who

has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter

(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the

manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle

to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected

repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited

Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only

the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a

manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan

Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail

within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you

have any questions about the service contract, call the

manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer Hot-

line at 1-800-521-9922.

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service

contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It

is not responsible for any service contract other than the

manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a ser-

vice contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract,

and you require service after the manufacturer's New

Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the

contract documents, and contact the person listed in

those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment when

you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also

made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to

assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership

experience. You'll be pleased with their sincere efforts to

resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 411

WARNING!

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain

vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals

known to the State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain

products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-

cals known to the State of California to cause cancer

and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)

See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and

provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable

to this vehicle.

MOPAR姞PARTS

Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are

available from an authorized dealer. They will help keep

the vehicle operating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could

cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the

manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an

investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in

a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your authorized

dealer, and the manufacturer.

412 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),

or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-

trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.

20590. You can also obtain other information about motor

vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you

should contact the Customer Service Department imme-

diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety

defect to the Canadian government should write to:

Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations

and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B

3V9.

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the

website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-

tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-

cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call

for an order form.

NOTE: A street address is required when ordering

manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

•

Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the

information that students and professional technicians

need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,

maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLC

vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the ve-

hicle, system, and/or components is written in

straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,

and charts.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 413

•

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-

grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-

cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians

to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-

hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to

find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-

step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,

proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools

and equipment.

•

Owner's Manuals

These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the

assistance of service and engineering specialists to

acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles.

Included are starting, operating, emergency and main-

tenance procedures as well as specifications, capabili-

ties and safety tips.

Call toll free at:

•

1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)

•

1–800–387–1143 (Canada)

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

•

www.techauthority.com

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by

the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The

specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer

in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on

your vehicle.

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety

requirements in addition to these grades.

414 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on

the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified government test course. For

example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half

times as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the

actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart

significantly from the norm due to variations in driving

habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-

teristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,

and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on

wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions

on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and

concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not

include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 415

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,

representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat

and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all

passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-

sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test

wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for

a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-

ing, either separately or in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire failure.

416 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ..............269

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........360

Adding Fuel ...........................312

Adding Washer Fluid .....................356

Additives, Fuel .........................310

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 352

Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............354

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............243

Air Conditioning Refrigerant ............. 354,355

Air Conditioning System ..................354

Air Pressure, Tires .......................289

Airbag ................................48

Airbag Deployment ..................... 53,55

Airbag Light ..................... 54,57,70,164

Airbag Maintenance .......................57

Airbag, Side ............................55

Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ............. 49,55

Alarm Light ...........................168

Alarm System (Security Alarm) ...............19

Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle .............8

Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................231

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........... 359,386,387

Capacities ...........................386

Disposal ............................362

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..............269

Anti-Lock Warning Light ..................165

Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........19

Appearance Care ........................368

Assistance Towing ........................94

Automatic Dimming Mirror .................76

Automatic Door Locks ................... 28,29

Automatic Transaxle ........... 12,251,256,332,366

Fluid Level Check ......................366

Interlock System .......................257

Overheating ..........................332

Selection Of Lubricant ...................366

Shifting .............................258

Special Additives ......................366

418 INDEX

Autostick .............................260

Battery ...............................353

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .......25

Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............355

B-Pillar Location ........................284

Brake Assist System ......................273

Brake Fluid ............................388

Brake, Parking ..........................267

Brake System ........................ 268,364

Anti-Lock (ABS) .................... 269,272

Master Cylinder .......................364

Parking .............................267

Warning Light ........................166

Brakes ............................. 268,364

Brake/Transmission Interlock ...............257

Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........68

Bulb Replacement ..................... 377,378

Bulbs, Light ............................377

Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........386

Capacities, Fluid ........................386

Caps, Filler

Fuel ................................312

Oil (Engine) ....................... 345,351

Power Steering ........................266

Car Washes ............................369

Carbon Monoxide Warning .................311

Cargo Area Cover .......................152

Cargo Area Features ......................151

Cargo Compartment

Light ...............................151

Cargo Light ............................151

Cargo Load Floor ........................153

Cargo Tie-Downs ........................153

Caution, Exhaust Gas ......................69

Cellular Phone ........................ 79,237

Center High Mounted Stop Light ............384

Chains, Tire ............................297

INDEX 419

Changing A Flat Tire .....................332

Chart, Tire Sizing ........................281

Check Engine Light

(Malfunction Indicator Light) ...............347

Child Restraint ..........................60

Child Restraint Tether Anchors ...............64

Child Restraint with Automatic Belts ...........63

Child Safety Locks ........................31

Child Seat ..............................66

Clean Air Gasoline .......................308

Cleaning

Wheels .............................370

Climate Control .........................237

Clock ..................... 185,188,202,205,214

Clutch ...............................364

Clutch Fluid ...........................364

Coin Holder ...........................150

Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............236

Compact Spare Tire ......................292

Compass Variance .......................182

Connector

UCI ................................224

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .........224

Console ..............................150

Contract, Service ........................411

Coolant (Antifreeze) ................... 386,387

Cooling System .........................358

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............360

Coolant Level ...................... 359,362

Disposal of Used Coolant ................362

Drain, Flush, and Refill ..................359

Inspection ...........................362

Points to Remember ................. 361,363

Pressure Cap .........................361

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...........359

Corrosion Protection .....................368

Cruise Light ...........................169

Cupholders ............................150

420 INDEX

Customer Assistance .....................409

Data Recorder, Event ......................58

Dealer Service ..........................349

Defroster, Rear Window ...................155

Defroster, Windshield ................... 70,238

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .................128

Diagnostic System, Onboard ................346

Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................124

Dipsticks

Power Steering ........................266

Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...............362

Engine Oil ...........................352

Door Locks .............................26

Door Locks, Automatic ....................28

Door Opener, Garage .....................134

Downshifting ..........................255

Driver's Seat Back Tilt ....................114

Driving

On Slippery Surfaces ....................262

Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow

Standing Water ........................263

Electric Remote Mirrors ....................77

Electrical Power Outlets ...................144

Electronic Brake Control System .............272

Anti-Lock Brake System .................272

Brake Assist System ....................273

Electronic Roll Mitigation ................274

Electronic Stability Program ...............275

Traction Control System .................272

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......131

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............275

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ....175

Emergency, In Case of

Jacking .............................332

Jump Starting .........................338

INDEX 421

Towing .............................341

Emission Control System Maintenance ...... 347,390

Engine ...............................345

Break-In Recommendations ................68

Checking Oil Level .....................349

Cooling .............................358

Exhaust Gas Caution ....................311

Fuel Requirements .....................307

Jump Starting .........................338

Oil ........................... 349,386,387

Oil Change Interval ....................350

Oil Filler Cap ...................... 345,351

Oil Filter ............................387

Oil Selection ..........................350

Oil Synthetic .........................351

Overheating ..........................330

Temperature Gauge .....................168

Enhanced Accident Response Feature ..........56

Event Data Recorder ......................58

Exhaust Gas Caution ............ 35,69,311,356,357

Exhaust System .........................356

Fabric Care ............................371

Filters

Air Cleaner ..........................352

Engine Oil ........................ 352,387

Flashers ..............................330

Hazard Warning .......................330

Turn Signal ........................ 164,381

Flat Tire Stowage ........................337

Flooded Engine Starting ...................253

Fluid, Brake ...........................388

Fluid Capacities .........................386

Fluid Leaks .............................70

Fluid Level Checks

Automatic Transaxle ....................366

Power Steering ........................266

Fluids ................................387

422 INDEX

Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..........387

Fog Lights ....................... 122,173,380

Folding Rear Seat ........................118

Folding Rear Seat (Sedan) ..................118

Four Wheel Drive .......................261

Systems .............................261

Four Wheel Drive Operation ................261

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ...................340

Fuel .............................. 307,387

Adding .............................312

Additives ............................310

Capacity ............................386

Clean Air ............................308

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ....................312

Gasoline ............................307

Gauge ..............................163

Light ...............................164

Octane Rating ........................307

Requirements .........................307

Tank Capacity ........................386

Fuel System Caution .....................314

Fueling ...............................312

Fuses ................................374

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威 ) ...........134

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............ 312,313,346

Gasoline, Clean Air ......................308

Gasoline (Fuel) ....................... 307,386

Gasoline, Reformulated ...................308

Gauges

Coolant Temperature ....................168

Fuel ................................163

Odometer ...........................171

Tachometer ..........................165

Gearshift ..............................258

General Information ................. 19,107,307

General Maintenance .....................349

Glass Cleaning ..........................372

INDEX 423

Gross Axle Weight Rating ..................317

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ............. 314,316

Hands-Free Phone (UConnect威 ) ..............79

Hazard

Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or

Shallow Standing Water .................263

Hazard Warning Flasher ...................330

Head Restraints .........................115

Headlights ............................378

Cleaning ............................372

High Beam ...........................124

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ........124

Passing .............................124

Replacing ............................378

Switch ..............................121

Heated Seats ...........................116

Hitches

Trailer Towing ........................318

HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 134

Hood Release ..........................119

Ignition ...............................12

Key .................................12

Ignition Key Removal .....................12

Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ................. 16,20

Infant Restraint ..........................61

Information Center, Vehicle .................175

Inside Rearview Mirror ....................75

Instrument Cluster .......................163

Instrument Panel and Controls ..............161

Instrument Panel Cover ...................372

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .............373

Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............374

Interior Appearance Care ..................371

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........128

Introduction .............................4

424 INDEX

Jack Location ...........................333

Jack Operation ....................... 332,334

Jacking Instructions ......................334

Jump Starting ..........................338

Key, Programming ........................18

Key, Replacement ........................17

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ...................16

Key-In Reminder .........................15

Keyless Entry System (Sedan) ................20

Keys .................................12

Knee Bolster ............................48

Lane Change and Turn Signals ..............381

Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................37

Latches

Hood ...............................119

Lead Free Gasoline ......................307

Life of Tires ............................294

Liftgate (Sedan) ..........................34

Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .............154

Light Bulbs ............................377

Lights .............................. 70,121

Airbag ........................ 54,57,70,164

Alarm ..............................168

Anti-Lock ...........................165

Back-Up .............................381

Brake Warning ........................166

Bulb Replacement ......................378

Cargo ..............................151

Center Mounted Stop ...................384

Daytime Running ......................123

Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...............121

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

Indicator ........................... 275,278

Engine Temperature Warning ..............166

Fog .......................... 122,173,380

Headlight Switch ......................121

INDEX 425

Headlights ...........................121

High Beam Indicator ....................165

Instrument Cluster .....................121

License .............................382

Lights On Reminder ....................122

Low Fuel ............................164

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ........172

Map Reading .........................126

Off-Road ............................125

Oil Pressure ..........................164

Seat Belt Reminder .....................165

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ............ 20,168

Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ..............168

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ...........169

Traction Control .......................275

Turn Signal ..................... 121,123,381

Voltage .............................163

Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) .....163

Loading Vehicle ...................... 314,315

Capacities ...........................315

Tires ...............................284

Locks

Child Protection ........................31

Door ................................26

Power Door ...........................27

Steering Wheel .........................15

Lubrication, Body .......................355

Lumbar Support ........................114

Maintenance Free Battery ..................353

Maintenance, General .....................349

Maintenance Procedures ...................349

Maintenance Schedule ....................390

Malfunction Indicator Light

(Check Engine) ....................... 172,347

Manual, Service .........................413

426 INDEX

Manual Transaxle .................. 251,254,366

Downshifting .........................255

Fluid Level Check ................... 367,368

Frequency of Fluid Change ............ 367,368

Lubricant Selection ............... 366,367,368

Map/Reading Lights .....................126

Master Cylinder (Brakes) ..................364

Mirrors ................................75

Automatic Dimming .....................76

Electric Powered .......................77

Outside ..............................76

Rearview .............................75

Vanity ...............................79

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle .............8

Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............298

Mopar Parts ......................... 348,412

Multi-Function Control Lever ...............121

New Vehicle Break-In Period ................68

Occupant Restraints .......................36

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............307

Odometer .............................171

Trip ............................. 169,171

Oil Change Indicator .....................176

Oil Change Indicator, Reset .................176

Oil, Engine ......................... 349,386

Capacity ............................386

Change Interval .......................350

Checking ............................349

Disposal ............................352

Filter ...............................352

Identification Logo .....................351

Materials Added to .....................351

Recommendation ................... 350,386

Synthetic ............................351

Viscosity ............................351

Onboard Diagnostic System .............. 346,347

Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威 ) ...........134

INDEX 427

Operator Manual (Owner's Manual) ............5

Outside Air Intake .......................244

Overdrive .............................259

Overheating, Engine ................... 168,330

Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) ......... 5,413

Paint Care .............................368

Panic Alarm ............................24

Parking Brake ..........................267

Passing Light ...........................124

Personal Settings ........................179

Pets ..................................68

Phone, Cellular ..........................79

Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect威 ) ..............79

Placard, Tire and Loading Information .........284

Power

Door Locks ...........................27

Mirrors ..............................77

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ..........144

Steering .......................... 265,266

Sunroof .............................140

Transfer Unit .........................368

Windows .............................32

Power Steering Fluid .....................388

Power Transfer Unit ......................368

Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............48

Preparation for Jacking ....................333

Pretensioners

Seat Belts .............................46

Programmable Electronic Features ............179

Programming Transmitters

(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................24

Radial Ply Tires .........................291

Radio Operation ........................237

Radio, Satellite ..........................229

Rear Axle (Differential) ....................367

Rear Drive Assembly .....................367

428 INDEX

Rear Liftgate (Sedan) ......................34

Rear Seat, Folding .......................118

Rear Window Defroster ...................155

Rear Window Features ....................154

Rear Wiper/Washer ......................154

Recorder, Event Data ......................58

Recreational Towing ......................327

Refrigerant ............................355

Reminder, Seat Belt .......................46

Remote Control

Door Locks ...........................20

Security Alarm .........................19

Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) ...............20

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........235

Replacement Bulbs .......................377

Replacement Keys ........................17

Replacement Parts .......................348

Replacement Tires .......................295

Reporting Safety Defects ...................412

Restraints, Child ....................... 60,66

Restraints, Infant .........................61

Restraints, Occupant ......................36

Retractable Cargo Area Cover ...............152

Roll Over Warning ........................4

Rotation, Tires ..........................297

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................69

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............70

Safety Defects, Reporting ..................412

Safety Information, Tire ...................279

Safety Tips .............................69

Satellite Radio ..........................229

Satellite Radio Antenna ...................231

Schedule, Maintenance ....................390

Seat Belt Maintenance ....................373

Seat Belt Reminder .......................46

Seat Belts ..............................36

Adjustable Shoulder Belt ..................42

INDEX 429

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ........42

And Pregnant Women ...................48

Child Restraint .........................60

Extender .............................47

Front Seat ............................37

Pretensioners ..........................46

Rear Seat .............................37

Seats .................................112

Adjustment ..........................112

Cleaning ............................371

Head Restraints .......................115

Heated ..............................116

Lumbar Support .......................114

Rear Folding .........................118

Rear Folding (Sedan) ....................118

Seatback Release .......................114

Tilting ..............................114

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ................19

Selection of Oil .........................350

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................. 16,20

Sentry Key Programming ...................18

Sentry Key Replacement ...................17

Service Assistance .......................409

Service Contract .........................411

Service Manuals ........................413

Setting the Clock ............. 185,188,202,205,214

Settings, Personal ........................179

Shift Speeds, Manual Transaxle ..............255

Shoulder Belts ...........................37

Side Airbag .............................55

Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) ..........245

Signals, Turn ........................ 164,381

Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ...............262

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................297

Snow Tires ............................297

Spare Tire .......................... 292,333

Specifications

Oil ................................350

430 INDEX

Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........... 131,169

Speedometer ...........................164

Starting ...............................251

Automatic Transmission .................251

Engine Fails to Start ....................253

Manual Transmission ...................251

Starting Procedures ......................251

Steering

Power ........................... 265,266

Tilt Column ..........................130

Wheel Lock ...........................15

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound

System Controls .........................235

Storage ............................ 147,377

Storage Bin ............................147

Stuck, Freeing ..........................340

Sun Roof ..............................140

Sun Visor Extension .......................79

Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ........48

Synthetic Engine Oil ......................351

Tachometer ............................165

Taillights ..............................381

Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ....... 168,331

Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ...............64

Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ................19

Theft System (Security Alarm) ...............19

Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ...................153

Tilt Steering Column .....................130

Tire and Loading Information Placard .........284

Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............283

Tire Markings ..........................279

Tire Safety Information ....................279

Tires ............................ 70,288,414

Aging (Life of Tires) ....................294

Air Pressure ..........................288

Chains ..............................297

Changing ............................332

INDEX 431

Compact Spare ........................292

Flat Changing ........................337

General Information ....................288

High Speed ..........................291

Inflation Pressures .....................289

Jacking .............................332

Life of Tires ..........................294

Load Capacity ........................284

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ...........298

Pressure Warning Light ..................169

Quality Grading .......................414

Radial ..............................291

Replacement .........................295

Rotation .............................297

Safety ........................... 279,288

Sizes ...............................281

Snow Tires ...........................297

Spare Tire ...........................333

Spinning ............................293

Tread Wear Indicators ...................294

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ..............320

Towing ...............................316

24-Hour Towing Assistance ................94

Disabled Vehicle .......................341

Guide ..............................319

Recreational ..........................327

Weight ..............................319

Towing Assistance ........................94

Trailer Towing ..........................316

Cooling System Tips ....................326

Hitches .............................318

Minimum Requirements .................321

Trailer and Tongue Weight ................320

Wiring ..............................324

Trailer Towing Guide .....................319

Trailer Weight ..........................319

Transaxle .............................256

Automatic .................... 12,251,256,366

432 INDEX

Autostick ............................260

Manual ........................ 14,251,254

Operation ...........................256

Overdrive ...........................259

Selection of Lubricant ...................366

Transmitter Battery Service

(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................25

Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威 ) . . 134

Transmitter Programming

(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................24

Transporting Pets ........................68

Tread Wear Indicators ....................294

Trip Odometer ..........................171

Trip Odometer Reset Button ................169

Turn Signals ...................... 123,164,381

UCI Connector .........................224

UConnect威 (Hands-Free Phone) ..............79

Understanding Your Instrument Panel .........161

Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................414

Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 224

Universal Transmitter .....................134

Unleaded Gasoline .......................307

Vanity Mirrors ...........................79

Variance, Compass .......................182

Vehicle Certification Label .................314

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............7

Vehicle Loading ................... 284,314,315

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ..............8

Vehicle Storage .........................377

Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........19

Voice Recognition System (VR) ..............107

Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster

Description) ...........................163

Warning, Roll Over ........................4

Warnings and Cautions .....................7

INDEX 433

Warranty Information .....................412

Washer, Adding Fluid .....................356

Washers, Windshield .....................128

Washing Vehicle .........................369

Water

Driving Through ......................263

Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................370

Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................370

Wind Buffeting .........................143

Window Airbag (Side Curtain) ............. 49,55

Window Fogging ........................244

Windows ..............................32

Power ...............................32

Windshield Washers ................... 127,128

Windshield Wipers .................... 127,355

Wipers, Intermittent ......................128

YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure ......371

434 INDEX

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING

EQUIPMENT

Special design considerations are incorporated into this

vehicle's electronic system to provide immunity to radio

frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone

equipment must be installed properly by trained person-

nel. The following must be observed during installation.

The positive power connection should be made directly

to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.

The negative power connection should be made to body

sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.

This connection should not be fused.

Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the

roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used

in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may

affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on

vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and

routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use

only fully shielded coaxial cable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to

ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than

normal may require special precautions.

All installations should be checked for possible interfer-

ence between the communications equipment and the

vehicle's electronic systems.

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING

EQUIPMENT

Special design considerations are incorporated into this

vehicle's electronic system to provide immunity to radio

frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone

equipment must be installed properly by trained person-

nel. The following must be observed during installation.

The positive power connection should be made directly

to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.

The negative power connection should be made to body

sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.

This connection should not be fused.

Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the

roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used

in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may

affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on

vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and

routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use

only fully shielded coaxial cable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to

ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than

normal may require special precautions.

All installations should be checked for possible interfer-

ence between the communications equipment and the

vehicle's electronic systems.

COMPASS 2009 owner's manual

2009 COMPASS

Chrysler LLC

81-326-0911 First Edition Printed in U.S.A.

2008 Jeep Compass Owner's Manual Pdf

Source: https://usermanual.wiki/Jeep/Jeep2009JeepCompassOwnersManual817322.456570740/html

2008 Jeep Compass Owner's Manual Pdf

0 Response to "2008 Jeep Compass Owner's Manual Pdf"

Post a Comment

Iklan Atas Artikel

Iklan Tengah Artikel 1

Iklan Tengah Artikel 2

Iklan Bawah Artikel